Navigation

  • Page 1

    9,Various NC/PLC interface 9,signals and functions 9, 9, 9,A2 67,Axis monitoring, 67, 67,protection zones 67, 67, 67,A3 151,Continuouspath Mode, 151,Exact Stop, LookAhead 151, 151,B1 213,Acceleration 213, 213,B2 275,Diagnostic tools 275, 275, 275,D1 327,Travel to fixed stop 327, ...

  • Page 2

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 3

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Foreword SINUMERIK® Documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: • General documentation • User documentation • Manufacturer/service documentation A monthly updated publications overview with r...

  • Page 4

    Foreword Basic Functions iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer. Other funct...

  • Page 5

    Foreword Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v Technical information The following notation is used in this documentation: Signal/Data Notation Example NC/PLC interface signals ... NC/PLC interface signal: Signal data (signal name) When the new gear step is enga...

  • Page 6

    Foreword Basic Functions vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Technical Support If you have any questions, please contact the following hotline: European and African time zone A&D Technical Support Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223 Interne...

  • Page 7

    Foreword Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 vii Questions about the Manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please send a fax or e-mail to the following address: Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315 Email: actionUR...

  • Page 8

    Foreword Basic Functions viii Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 9

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 13,______________ 49,______________ 15,______________ 51,______________ 53,______________ 13,Brief description 13, 13, 13,1 15,Detailed description 15, 15,2 49,Supplementary conditions 49, ...

  • Page 10

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 11

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 13,1-1 2 Detai...

  • Page 12

    Table of contents Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index................................................................................................................................................ 63,Index-1 63,

  • Page 13

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1Content The PLC/NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other. The data interface contains status and control signals, auxi...

  • Page 14

    Brief description Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 15

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals 2.1.1 General NC/PLC interface The NC/PLC interface comprises the following parts: • Data interface • Function interface Data in...

  • Page 16

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NC and operator-panel-front-specific signals (DB10) PLC to NC: • Signals for influencing the CNC inputs and outputs • Keyswitch sign...

  • Page 17

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 References For detailed information about the following subject areas, please refer to: • Description of the basic PLC program: /FB1/ ...

  • Page 18

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.3 Alarm signals to PLC DB10, DBX103.0 (HMI alarm pending) The HMI component signals that at least one HMI alarm is pending. DB10, DB...

  • Page 19

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.5 Signals to/from panel front DB19, DBX0.0 (operator panel inhibit) All inputs via operator components on the operator panel front a...

  • Page 20

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19, DBX0.7 (actual value in WCS, 0=MCS) Switching over of actual-value display between machine and workpiece coordinate system: • DB...

  • Page 21

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 DB19, DBB25 (control of V24 interface) (HMI Embedded only) Output byte for RS-232 data transmission error values. DB19, DBB26 (control o...

  • Page 22

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable) Axis disable when machine axis is at rest No traversing request (manual or automatic) is carrie...

  • Page 23

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Note When the servo enable is set from follow-up mode, if the part program is active, the last programmed position is approached again ...

  • Page 24

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-1 Effect of servo enable and follow-up mode Figure 2-2 Trajectory for clamping and "hold"

  • Page 25

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Figure 2-3 Trajectory for clamping and "follow-up" Drives with analog setpoint interface A drive with an analog setpoint int...

  • Page 26

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note "Followup mode" does not have to be canceled because it only has an effect in combination with "servo enable"...

  • Page 27

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Figure 2-4 Position measuring system 1 and 2 The table below shows the functionality of the interface signals in conjunction with the ...

  • Page 28

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation methods The closed-loop servo enable for a machine axis is influenced by: • PLC user program by means of the following NC/...

  • Page 29

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 • The position actual value of the machine axis continues to be acquired by the control. • At the end of the braking operation, the...

  • Page 30

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX2.2 (Delete distance-to-go/Spindle reset (axis-/spindle-specific)) "Delete distance-to-go" is effective in AUTO...

  • Page 31

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Parameter set changeover when machine axis is in motion The response to a parameter-set changeover depends on the consequential change ...

  • Page 32

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary) "Axis/spindle stationary" is set by the NC if: • No new setpoints are to be out...

  • Page 33

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 DB31, ... DBX20.3 (speed setpoint smoothing) (not on 810D) Request to smooth the speed setpoint. DB31, ... DBX21.0 / 21.1 / 21.2 (driv...

  • Page 34

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX21.6 (integrator disable n-controller) (not on 810D) The PLC user program inhibits the integrator of the speed controller...

  • Page 35

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 DB31, ... DBX92.3 (speed-setpoint smoothing active) (not on 810D) The PLC user program requests speed-setpoint smoothing filter for th...

  • Page 36

    Detailed description 2.1 NC/PLC interface signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX94.2 (ramp-up function completed) This signal indicates that the actual speed value has reached the new setpoint allowing...

  • Page 37

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 DB31, ... DBX95.7 (i2t monitoring) (not 810D) The variable signaling function can be used to protect the power section of the SIMODRIVE 611 universal...

  • Page 38

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 REFRESH suppression MD10131 $MN_SUPPRESS_SCREEN_REFRESH (screen refresh in case of overload) Default setting for screen-refresh strategy with high NC...

  • Page 39

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Programming A general description of how to program involute interpolation can be found in: References: /PG/ Fundamentals Programming Guide In additio...

  • Page 40

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-8 Limited angle of rotation towards base circle The alarm display can be suppressed using the following parameter settings: MD21016 $MC_INVO...

  • Page 41

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 2.2.3 Activate DEFAULT memory GUD start values The DEF... / REDEF... NC commands can be used to assign default settings to global user data (GUD). The...

  • Page 42

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Access from NC To allow the NC to access PLC variables (from a part program) quickly, $ variables are provided in the NCK. The PLC uses a function cal...

  • Page 43

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Figure 2-9 Communications buffer (DPR) for NC/PLC communication Supplementary conditions • The user's programming engineer (NCK and PLC) is respons...

  • Page 44

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example Bypassing the problem by means of comparison on "EPSILON" (minor deviation) Block number Program code N10 DEF REAL DBR N12 DEF REAL...

  • Page 45

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Behavior during POWER ON, block search The DPR communications buffer is initialized during "POWER ON". During a "block search", th...

  • Page 46

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Access features • Protection level 0 provides the greatest number of access rights, protection level 7 the least. • If certain access rights are g...

  • Page 47

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Defaults The following default passwords are defined for protection levels 1 to 3: • Protection level 1: SUNRISE • Protection level 2: EVENING •...

  • Page 48

    Detailed description 2.2 Functions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Switch positions Switch position 0 has the most restricted access rights. Switch position 3 has the least restricted access rights. DB10, DBX56.4 / ....

  • Page 49

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 50

    Supplementary conditions Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 51

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Example 4Parameter set changeover A parameter-set changeover is performed to change the position-control gain (servo gain factor) for machine axis X1 from v = 4.0 to Kv = 0.5. Prerequisit...

  • Page 52

    Example Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter-set-dependent machine data Parameter-set-dependent machine data are set as follows: Machine data Remarks MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN [0, AX1] = 4.0 Servo gain setting f...

  • Page 53

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Drive-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MD_ Description 1403 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_SPEED Shutoff speed for pulse suppression 1404 PULSE_SUPPRES...

  • Page 54

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.1.2 Memory specific machine data Number Identifier: $MM_ Description HMI Advanced HMI Embedded 9000 9000 LCD_CONTRAST Contrast 9001 9001 DISPLAY_TYPE M...

  • Page 55

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MM_ Description 9212 9212 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD Protection level write user variables 9213 9213 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH Protection le...

  • Page 56

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MM_ Description 9513 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P Protection level for network drive 4 for PROGRAM operating area 9516 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_...

  • Page 57

    Data lists 5.2 System variables Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 5.1.5 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT Output of axis signals for simulation axes 33050 LUB...

  • Page 58

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3.2 Signals from NC DB number Byte.Bit Description 10 103.0 Remote diagnostics (MMC alarm is active) 10 103.5 AT box ready 10 103.6 MMC temperature limit 10 103...

  • Page 59

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-7 5.3.3 Signals to operator panel front DB number Byte.Bit Description 19 0.0 Screen bright 19 0.1 Darken screen 19 0.2 Key disable 19 0.3 Delete Cancel alarms (HMI...

  • Page 60

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3.4 Signals from operator panel front DB number Byte.Bit Description 19 20.1 Screen is dark 19 20.7 Switch over MCS/WCS 19 24.0 Error (Acknowledgment byte for c...

  • Page 61

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-9 5.3.7 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 1.3 Axis/spindle disable 31, ... 1.4 Follow-up mode 31, ... 1.5 Position measuring system 1 3...

  • Page 62

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) 5-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3.8 Signals from axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 60.4 / 60.5 Referenced, synchronized 1 / Referenced, synchronized 2 31, ... 61.3 Followup ...

  • Page 63

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index 6 611D Ready, 17,2-3 A Access authorization, 45,2-32 Access features, 45,2-33 Access security, 45,2-32 Actual value synchronization, 29,2-15 Actual value in workpiece coor...

  • Page 64

    Index Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 33,DBX21.1, 2-19 33,DBX21.2, 2-19 33,DBX21.3, 2-19 33,DBX21.4, 2-19 33,DBX21.5, 2-19 34,DBX21.6, 2-20 27,DBX21.7, 2-14, 34,2-20 26,DBX60.4, 2-12 26,DBX60.6, 2-12 26,...

  • Page 65

    Index Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 MD21016, 40,2-27 MD28150, 44,2-31 MD28530, 40,2-27 MD31050 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM, 51,4-1 MD31060 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA, 51,4-1 MD32200, 31,2-17 MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_...

  • Page 66

    Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions (A2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-4

  • Page 67

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 71,______________ 73,______________ 129,______________ 131,______________ 143,______________ 71,Brief Description 71, 71,1 73,Detailed description 73, 73,2 129,Supplementary conditions 129, 129, 129,3 131,...

  • Page 68

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 69

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 71,1-1 1.1 Axis monitoring ...

  • Page 70

    Table of contents Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4 Examples................................................................................................................................................ 131,4-1 4.1 Definition and...

  • Page 71

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 11.1 1.1 Axis monitoring functions Function Comprehensive monitoring functions are present in the control for protection of people and machines: • Motion monitoring functions – C...

  • Page 72

    Brief Description 1.2 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1.2 1.2 Protection zones Function With the help of protection zones, elements of the machine (e.g. spindle chuck, tool changer, tool holder, tailstock, movable ...

  • Page 73

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 Motion monitoring functions 2.1.1 Contour monitoring 2.1.1.1 Contour error Contour errors are caused by signal distortions in the position control loop. Signal distortio...

  • Page 74

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Nonlinear signal distortions Nonlinear signal distortions are caused by: • Activation of the current limitation within the machining area • Ac...

  • Page 75

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Figure 2-1 Following-Error Monitoring Effectivity The following-error monitoring only operates with active position control and the following axi...

  • Page 76

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.2 Positioning, zero speed and clamping monitoring 2.1.2.1 Correlation between positioning, zero-speed and clamping monitoring Overview The fol...

  • Page 77

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.2.2 Positioning monitoring Function At the end of a positioning operation: • Set velocity = 0 AND • DB31, ... DBX64.6/64.7 (motion command...

  • Page 78

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Fault If the configured position-monitoring time is exceeded, the following alarm appears: 25080 "Axis <Axis identifier> Position monit...

  • Page 79

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Fault If the delay time and/or the standstill tolerance is exceeded, the following alarm appears: 25040 "Axis <Axis identifier> Zero-sp...

  • Page 80

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The clamping monitoring is not active in "follow-up mode" (DB31, ... DBX1.4 = 1). Fault If the clamping tolerance is exceeded, t...

  • Page 81

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Figure 2-2 Release axis clamp if MD36052 $MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING = 'H01' The part-program blocks N310 and N410 refer to the following programming ex...

  • Page 82

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Optimized releasing of the axis clamp via travel command If a clamped axis is to be traversed in continuous-path mode, a travel command is issued...

  • Page 83

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Automatic stopping for setting of the clamp If an axis is to be clamped in continuous-path mode, the NC stops the path motion before the next &qu...

  • Page 84

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-4 Set axis clamp if MD36052 $MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING = 'H04' Constraints Continuous-path mode For the above-mentioned functions: • Automa...

  • Page 85

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Example: The part-program blocks N320 and N420 are inserted in the programming example used. N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 G90 G54 F500 N101 G641 ADIS=....

  • Page 86

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block-change criterion: Clamping tolerance After activation of clamp monitoring:(DB31, ... DBX2.3 = 1) the block-change criterion for traversing ...

  • Page 87

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Figure 2-5 Speed setpoint calculation The speed-setpoint monitoring ensures by limiting the control or output signal (10V for analog setpoint in...

  • Page 88

    Detailed description 2.1 Motion monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Effectivity The speed-setpoint monitoring is only active for closed-loop position-controlled axes and cannot be deactivated. Fault If the configu...

  • Page 89

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Effectivity The actual-velocity monitoring only operates with active position control and the following axis types:...

  • Page 90

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Fault Upon exceeding of the encoder limit frequency, the following occurs: • Message to the PLC: DB31, ... DBX60....

  • Page 91

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 2.2.2 Zero-mark monitoring 2.2.2.1 General Function Zero-mark monitoring serves as a plausibility check for the act...

  • Page 92

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.2.2 Zero-mark monitoring for incremental encoders Function Incremental encoders with one or more zero marks use...

  • Page 93

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 2.2.2.3 Zero-mark monitoring for absolute encoders Function Absolute encoders use the absolute values supplied by t...

  • Page 94

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note In the event of a fault, the adjustment of the absolute encoder is lost and the axis is no longer referenced....

  • Page 95

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Effectivity Customized monitoring can be activated in parallel to or as an alternative to standard zero-mark monito...

  • Page 96

    Detailed description 2.2 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with SIMODRIVE 611D) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 System variable Meaning positions triggers a zero reset; reset does not reset the counter. $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ERR_CNT...

  • Page 97

    Detailed description 2.3 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with PROFIBUS drives) Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 2.3 2.3 Measuring-system monitoring (systems with PROFIBUS drives) The NC has no direct access to the measuring-sy...

  • Page 98

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-7 Travel limits 2.4.2 Hardware limit switches Function A hardware limit switch is normally installed at the end of the traversing range...

  • Page 99

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Effectivity The hardware limit-switch monitoring is active after the control has ramped up in all modes. Effect Upon reaching the hardware limit ...

  • Page 100

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.3 Software limit switch Function Software limit switches serve to limit the traversing range of a machine axis. Per machine axis and per trav...

  • Page 101

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Effect Automatic operating modes (AUTOMATIC, MDI) 1. Without transformation, without overlaid movement, unchanged software limit switch: A part p...

  • Page 102

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.4 Working area limitation Function Working-area limitation via setting data The working-area limitation serves to limit the traversing range ...

  • Page 103

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Figure 2-8 Working-area limitation References: /PG/Programming Manual Fundamentals Effectivity • Immediately after the successful referencing ...

  • Page 104

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programmable working-area limitation The activation/deactivation of the programmable working-area limitation takes place via the part program ins...

  • Page 105

    Detailed description 2.4 Monitoring of static limits Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Effect Automatic operating modes 1. With / without transformation The part program block with a programmed traversing motion that would lead to o...

  • Page 106

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5 2.5 Protection zones 2.5.1 General Function Protection zones are static or moveable in 2- or 3-dimensional ranges within a machine to protect machine el...

  • Page 107

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Referenc • Tool-related protection zones Coordinates for toolrelated protection zones must be given as absolute values referred to the tool carrier refere...

  • Page 108

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Maximum number of protection areas The maximum definable number of machine- and channel-related protection zones is set via: MD18190 $MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NC...

  • Page 109

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 Figure 2-10 Example of a milling machine Figure 2-11 Example of a turning machine with relative protection zone for tailstock

  • Page 110

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.3 Definition via part program instruction General A protection-zone definition must contain the following information: • Protection zone type (workpie...

  • Page 111

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Definition beginning The definition start is defined by the corresponding subroutine: • CPROTDEF(n, t, applim, appplus, appminus) • NPROTDEF(n, t, appli...

  • Page 112

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-12 Examples: External and internal protection zone Toolrelated protection zones must be convex. If a concave protection zone is required, the prot...

  • Page 113

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Contour elements The following contour elements are permissible: • G0, G1 for straight contour elements • G2 for circle segments in the clockwise direct...

  • Page 114

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.4 Definition via system variable General If the protection zones are defined with part program instructions (see Chapter: Definition by means of part pr...

  • Page 115

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 System variable Type Meaning $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[n, i] $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[n, i] REAL Center point of the circular contour[i], absolute ordinate value $SN_... are s...

  • Page 116

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.5 Activation and deactivation of protection zones General The activation status of a protection zone is: • Preactivated • Preactivated with conditio...

  • Page 117

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Deactivation A protection zone can be deactivated from a part program only. RESET response The activation status of a protection zone is retained even after...

  • Page 118

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation via PLC user program A protection zone preactivated in the part program can be activated in the PLC user program. Preactivated protection zones T...

  • Page 119

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 Automatic activation after the control powers up The configuration for automatic activation of a protection zone after the control powers up is performed vi...

  • Page 120

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.6 Protection-zone violation and temporary enabling of individual protection zones Function Workpiece and toolrelated protection zones that are activated...

  • Page 121

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 Geo-axis replacement Machine data can be used to configure protection zones and working-area limitations for geo-axis replacement: • Protection zones can ...

  • Page 122

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-15 Behavior of the path velocity when entering a protection zone Overlaying several axis motions Overlaid motions of external ZO (zero offsets) or...

  • Page 123

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 Application for temporary enabling: Drilling a turned part: The drill is allowed to enter the protection zone of the spindle chuck. Monitoring of overlaid m...

  • Page 124

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Behavior in JOG mode Overlaying several axis motions In JOG mode traversing can be performed simultaneously in several geometry axes even when protection zo...

  • Page 125

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 Note While any one axis in the geometry system is still oscillating, the status "Motions of axes in geometry system completed" cannot be reached...

  • Page 126

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Temporary enabling of protection zones Protection zones can be enabled in JOG mode when: 1. the current position is within a protection zone (alarm active) ...

  • Page 127

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 Positioning axes For positioning axes, only the programmed block end point is monitored. An alarm is displayed during the traversing motion of the positioni...

  • Page 128

    Detailed description 2.5 Protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 129

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 3.1 Axis monitoring functions Settings For correct operation of the monitoring, the following settings must be made or checked, in addition to the machine data mentioned:...

  • Page 130

    Supplementary conditions 3.1 Axis monitoring functions Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 131

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Requirement The following internal protection zones are to be defined for a turning machine: • One machine- and workpiecerelated prote...

  • Page 132

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 4-1 Example of protection zones on a lathe

  • Page 133

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 Protection-zone definition in the part program Table 4-1 Part program excerpt for protection-zone definition: DEF INT AB G18 ; Definition ...

  • Page 134

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Protection-zone definition with system variables Table 4-2 Protection zone: Spindle chuck System variable Value Comment $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[0...

  • Page 135

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-5 ; Protection zone for spindle chuck, contour element 6 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[0,7] 0 ; Endpoint of contour[i], ordinate value ; Protection zone fo...

  • Page 136

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[0.1] 0 ; Midpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for spindle chuck, contour element 1 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[0,2]...

  • Page 137

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-7 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[0,0] 1 ; Contour type[i] : 1 = G1 for even, ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 0 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[0,1] 1 ; Con...

  • Page 138

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 4 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[0,5] 0 ; Endpoint of contour[i], ordinate value ; Protection zone for wo...

  • Page 139

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-9 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[0,9] 0 ; Endpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 9 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[1,0] -50...

  • Page 140

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ; Protection zone for tool holder, contour element 3 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[1.4] 0 ; Midpoint of contour[i], ordinate value ; Protection zone for...

  • Page 141

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-11 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[1.8] 0 ; Midpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for tool holder, contour element 8 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[1.9] ...

  • Page 142

    Examples 4.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 4-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 143

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Axis monitoring functions None Protection zones Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10604 WALIM_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE Working-area limitati...

  • Page 144

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Protection zones Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN Number of files for channelspecific protection zones 28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE ...

  • Page 145

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW Encoder limit frequency resynchronization 36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING Zero-mark monitoring 36400 CONTOUR_TOL Tol...

  • Page 146

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3 5.3 Signals 5.3.1 Signals to channel Axis monitoring functions None Protection zones DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 1.1 Enable protection zones 21, ... 4.7 Feed ov...

  • Page 147

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 274.0 Channelspecific protection zone 1 preactivated : : 21, ... 274.7 Channelspecific protection zone 8 preactivated 21, ... 275.0 Chan...

  • Page 148

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 149

    Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A Activation of protection zones Example, 140,4-11 Axis clamping Operations, optimized, 79,2-7 79, Axis monitoring functions, 71,1-1 Actual velocity, 88,2-16 88, Axis/spindlespecific mac...

  • Page 150

    Index Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD31060, 129,3-1 MD31070, 129,3-1 MD31080, 129,3-1 MD32000, 74,2-2 MD32200, 74,2-2 MD32200, 77,2-5 MD32250, 129,3-1 MD32260, 129,3-1 MD32300, 74,2-2 MD32610, 74,2-2 MD32800, 74,2...

  • Page 151

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 155,______________ 157,______________ 203,______________ 205,______________ 207,______________ 155,Brief Description 155, 155,1 157,Detailed description 157, 157,2 203,Supplementary conditions 203, ...

  • Page 152

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 153

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 155,1-1 2 Detailed...

  • Page 154

    Table of contents Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 155

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Continuous-path mode In continuous-path mode, the NC attempts to keep the programmed path velocity as constant as possible. In particular, deceleration of the path axes at ...

  • Page 156

    Brief Description Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Smoothing the path velocity "Smoothing the path velocity" is a function especially for applications (such as high speed milling in mold and die production) that...

  • Page 157

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 General 2.1.1 Parameterization of the reset response The channel-specific basic position is activated via a reset: MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (RESET position...

  • Page 158

    Detailed description 2.2 Exact stop Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Effects If a block change cannot be executed in continuous path mode, all axes programmed in this part program block (except cross-block traversing specia...

  • Page 159

    Detailed description 2.2 Exact stop Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Parameterization The tolerance windows of the exact stop criteria are specified with the following machine data: • MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop f...

  • Page 160

    Detailed description 2.2 Exact stop Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block change depending on exact-stop criteria The figure below illustrates the block change timing in terms of the selected exact stop criterion. Figure...

  • Page 161

    Detailed description 2.2 Exact stop Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Assignable specification of the active exact stop criterion The active exact stop criterion can be permanently specified for the part program commands of ...

  • Page 162

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Assignable exact stop criterion for rapid traverse transitions in continuous path mode The behavior at the block transition of part program bloc...

  • Page 163

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Continuouspath mode is suitable if: • A contour must be traversed as quickly as possible (e.g., with rapid traverse). • The exact contour ma...

  • Page 164

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The current block contains traversing commands for geometry axes and the following block traversing commands for synchronized axes or, alter...

  • Page 165

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 2.3.2 Velocity reduction according to overload factor Velocity reduction according to overload factor The function lowers the path velocity in c...

  • Page 166

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Selection and deselection of velocity reduction Continuouspath mode with velocity reduction according to overload factor can be selected modall...

  • Page 167

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.3.3 Rounding according to path criterion Blending Rounding means that an angular block transition is changed to a tangential block transition...

  • Page 168

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 No intermediate rounding blocks An intermediate rounding block is not inserted in the following situations: 1 The axis stops between the two ...

  • Page 169

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Synchronized axes If a number of paths need to be synchronized (e.g., contour, special axis), then every path must always have its own rounding...

  • Page 170

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization of the path criterion • ADISPOS is programmed in the same way as ADIS, but must be used specifically for movements in rapid ...

  • Page 171

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Programming example N1 G641Y50 F10 ADIS = 0.5 N2 X50 N3 X50.7 N4 Y50.7 N5 Y51.4 N6 Y51.0 N7 X52.1 In blocks with short distances (distance <...

  • Page 172

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Extensions G643 is not used to generate a separate rounding block, but axisspecific blockinternal rounding movements are inserted. The expansio...

  • Page 173

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Possible combinations The following table indicates for G642 and G643 the effect of axis tolerances in the following machine data: MD33100 COMP...

  • Page 174

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Differences between G642 - G643 With regard to their rounding behavior, commands G642 ad G643 differ as follows: G642 G643 With G642, the roun...

  • Page 175

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Profile for limit velocity The use of a velocity profile can be controlled during rounding using the hundreds digit in the machine data: MD2048...

  • Page 176

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Configuration The rounding is configured with G644 using the following machine data: MD20480 SMOOTHING_MODE (comparison of the rounding with G6...

  • Page 177

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 BRISK With BRISK, no jerk limitation is active; the acceleration of each axis reaches its maximum value in the entire rounding area. SOFT With ...

  • Page 178

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Advantages The following improvements are possible: • Avoidance of excitations of possible machine resonance due to continuous, transient bra...

  • Page 179

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 The actual extension will always be smaller, and may even be 0, if the criterion is not met by any of the accelerations. Values between 50 and ...

  • Page 180

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation The smoothing of the path velocity is activated with machine data, which is active with NewConfig: MD20460 LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR Wit...

  • Page 181

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Figure 2-7 Characteristic of the smoothed path velocity 2.3.6 Dynamic response adaptation Key statement Highly dynamic acceleration and decele...

  • Page 182

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Constraints The dynamic response adaptation considers only the resulting path and not the deceleration and acceleration processes of the indivi...

  • Page 183

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Adaptations In order to clarify the adaptation processes sketched below, please note the following basic principles: The size of the time windo...

  • Page 184

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-8 Path velocity profile optimized for time without smoothing or dynamic adaptation response Figure 2-9 Path velocity profile with ad...

  • Page 185

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Example 2: Effect of smoothing the path velocity and dynamic response adaptation: acceleration mode: BRISK Parameter assignment Machine data $...

  • Page 186

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Effects of path smoothing • Interval: t1 - t2 The acceleration and deceleration process between t1 - t2 does not take place because the lengt...

  • Page 187

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Example 3: Effect of adaptation and smoothing the path velocity; acceleration mode: BRISK Parameter assignment $MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC[1] = 4 ...

  • Page 188

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 With path dynamic response adaptation, without path smoothing The path-velocity characteristic has been obtained through selection of path dy...

  • Page 189

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 $MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC[1] = 4 $MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR = 0% (same meaning as $MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FACTOR = 100%) Installation and startup The bas...

  • Page 190

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3.7 Technology G group Dynamic response settings for technology G groups Different settings can be stored and programmed for five different m...

  • Page 191

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Enabling selected dynamics groups only Some G codes can be deactivated by the machine manufacturer. If deactivated G codes are programmed alarm...

  • Page 192

    Detailed description 2.3 Continuous-path mode Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activate parameter sets for dynamic response By programming G codes, the machine data affecting dynamics are activated and assigned as follows:...

  • Page 193

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 2.4 2.4 LookAhead Function LookAhead is a procedure in continuouspath mode (G64, G641) that achieves velocity control with LookAhead over several NC part ...

  • Page 194

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Scope The LookAhead function is only available for path axes and not for spindles and positioning axes. LookAhead carries out a block-specific analysis of...

  • Page 195

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 The 31st override value must tally with the override factor most frequently used. The number of blocks considered by the LookAhead function is limited by...

  • Page 196

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Override points If the velocity profile of the following block velocity is not sufficient because, for example, very high override values, e.g., 200%, or ...

  • Page 197

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Figure 2-14 Example for limiting velocity characteristics with number of LookAhead blocks = 4 ... and the following settings: MD20430 LOOKAH_NUM_OVR_POI...

  • Page 198

    Detailed description 2.4 LookAhead Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Special cases of LookAhead Axis-specific feed stop and axis-specific axis disable are ignored by LookAhead. If an axis is to be interpolated that should o...

  • Page 199

    Detailed description 2.5 NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, -CAD Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 2.5 2.5 NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, -CAD COMPON, COMPCURV The modal G code COMPON or COMPCURV can be used to ac...

  • Page 200

    Detailed description 2.5 NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, -CAD Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Recommendation for MD settings The following machine data affect the compressor function and should contain the following...

  • Page 201

    Detailed description 2.5 NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, -CAD Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Activating the MD values The new values are activated after the NewConfig command. The rounding function G642 and jerk li...

  • Page 202

    Detailed description 2.5 NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, -CAD Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 203

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 3.1 Rounding and repositioning (REPOS) Repositioning within the rounding area If the traversing motion of the path axes within the corner rounding area is interr...

  • Page 204

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Smoothing the path velocity Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 3-1 Example of Rounding and REPOS 3.2 3.2 Smoothing the path velocity Several blocks with SOFT and BRISK Smoothing of the pat...

  • Page 205

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 4.1 Example of jerk limitation on the path ... N1000 G64 SOFT ; Continuous-path mode with SOFT acceleration characteristics N1004 G0 X-20 Y10 N1005 G1 X-20 Y0 ; Straight N1...

  • Page 206

    Examples 4.1 Example of jerk limitation on the path Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 207

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 General machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10110 PLC_CYCLE_TIME_AVERAGE Maximum PLC acknowledgment time 18360 MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE FIF...

  • Page 208

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 28530 MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS Number of storage elements for limiting path velocity in block 28540 MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS Number ...

  • Page 209

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 5.2 5.2 Setting data 5.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42465 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL Max. contour deviation on rounding 42466 SMOO...

  • Page 210

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 211

    Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A Adaptation Dynamic Response, 156,1-2 Auxiliary function output, 164,2-8 B Blending, 167,2-11 Block-change point, 162,2-6 C COMP 199,CAD, 2-43 COMPCURV, 199,2-43 COMPON, 199,...

  • Page 212

    Index Continuouspath Mode, Exact Stop, LookAhead (B1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N NC block compressor COMPON, COMPCURV, COMCAD, 199,2-43 O Orientation axes, 167,2-11 Overload fact 165,or, 2-9 P Path criterion, 169,2-13 POS, 163,2-7 R Rounding with contour ...

  • Page 213

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Acceleration (B2) 219,______________ 221,______________ 263,______________ 265,______________ 271,______________ 219,Brief description 219, 219, 219,1 221,Functions 221, 221, 221,2 263,Supplementary conditions 263, 263, 263,3 265,Examples 265, ...

  • Page 214

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 215

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 219,1-1 1.1 Customer benefit.......................

  • Page 216

    Table of contents Acceleration (B2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.2 Activation.................................................................................................................................. 232,2-12 2.6.3 Programming................................

  • Page 217

    Table of contents Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 2.15 Jerk with programmed rapid traverse (G00) (axis-specific)..................................................... 248,2-28 2.15.1 Detailed Description.......................................................

  • Page 218

    Table of contents Acceleration (B2) vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 219

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 11.1 1.1 Customer benefit Scope of functions The Description of Functions covers the following sub-functions: • Acceleration • Jerk • Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic Acceleration and jerk Th...

  • Page 220

    Brief description 1.3 Requirements Acceleration (B2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Channel-specific functions: • Acceleration profile that can be selected via part-program instruction: Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK) • Programmable constant travel tim...

  • Page 221

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Functions 22.1 2.1 Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK/BRISKA) (channel-/axis-specific) 2.1.1 Detailed Description 2.1.1.1 General Information General Information In the case of acceleration without jerk limitatio...

  • Page 222

    Functions 2.1 Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK/BRISKA) (channel-/axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Acceleration profile Figure 2-1 Velocity and acceleration schematic for stepped acceleration profile amax: Maximum acceleration...

  • Page 223

    Functions 2.1 Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK/BRISKA) (channel-/axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 2.1.1.2 Programmable maximum value (axis-specific) Function The maximum acceleration value can be set for each specific machine a...

  • Page 224

    Functions 2.1 Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK/BRISKA) (channel-/axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Reset response The channel-specific initial setting is activated via a reset: MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] Supplementary c...

  • Page 225

    Functions 2.2 Constant travel time (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.2 2.2 Constant travel time (channel-specific) 2.2.1 Detailed Description 2.2.1.1 General Information Overview In the case of acceleration without jerk limitation, s...

  • Page 226

    Functions 2.2 Constant travel time (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1: Characteristic with constant travel time 2: Characteristic without constant travel time amax: Maximum acceleration value vmax: Maximum velocity value t: Time The ...

  • Page 227

    Functions 2.3 Acceleration matching (ACC) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 2.3 2.3 Acceleration matching (ACC) (axis-specific) 2.3.1 Detailed Description 2.3.1.1 General Information Function A part-program instruction (ACC) can be used t...

  • Page 228

    Functions 2.4 Acceleration margin (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Functionality The ACC part-program instruction is used to adjust the maximum acceleration value of a machine axis. Axis: • Value range: Axis identifier for the chann...

  • Page 229

    Functions 2.5 Path-acceleration limitation (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 2.4.2 Activation 2.4.2.1 Parameterization Parameterization Parameters for the acceleration margin are assigned for each channel by means of machine datum: MD2...

  • Page 230

    Functions 2.5 Path-acceleration limitation (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.2 Activation 2.5.2.1 Parameterization Parameterization Parameterization is carried out for specific channels using setting data: SD42500 $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_...

  • Page 231

    Functions 2.6 Path acceleration for real-time events (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Functionality The path-acceleration limitation can be activated/deactivated by programming the setting data. Parameter: Value • Value range: TRUE...

  • Page 232

    Functions 2.6 Path acceleration for real-time events (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Real-time-event path acceleration is enabled, irrespective of the radial acceleration. Effective Effective Real-time event acceleration i...

  • Page 233

    Functions 2.7 Acceleration with programmed rapid traverse (G00) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Functionality Real-time-event path acceleration is set via the channel-specific system variables. Parameter: Path acceleration • Value ra...

  • Page 234

    Functions 2.8 Acceleration with active jerk limitation (SOFT/SOFTA) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.2 Activation 2.7.2.1 Parameterization The maximum value for axis-specific acceleration with programmed rapid traverse is parameter...

  • Page 235

    Functions 2.8 Acceleration with active jerk limitation (SOFT/SOFTA) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 The maximum value for acceleration with active jerk limitation is parameterized using a factor calculated in relation to the axis-speci...

  • Page 236

    Functions 2.9 Excessive acceleration for non-tangential block transitions (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9 2.9 Excessive acceleration for non-tangential block transitions (axis-specific) 2.9.1 Detailed Description 2.9.1.1 General In...

  • Page 237

    Functions 2.10 Acceleration margin for radial acceleration (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 2.9.3 Programming Programmability The function is not programmable. 2.10 2.10 Acceleration margin for radial acceleration (channel-specific) ...

  • Page 238

    Functions 2.10 Acceleration margin for radial acceleration (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 When, for example, a value of 0.75 is applied, 75% of the axis-specific acceleration will be made available for radial acceleration and 25% f...

  • Page 239

    Functions 2.11 Jerk limitation with path interpolation (SOFT) (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 2.10.2 Activation 2.10.3 Programming Programmability The function is not programmable. 2.11 2.11 Jerk limitation with path interpolation (...

  • Page 240

    Functions 2.11 Jerk limitation with path interpolation (SOFT) (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Acceleration profile Figure 2-4 Jerk, acceleration and velocity schematic with jerk limitation acceleration profile rmax: Maximum jerk v...

  • Page 241

    Functions 2.11 Jerk limitation with path interpolation (SOFT) (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 • Interval: t4 - t5 Constant braking acceleration with -amax; linear decrease in velocity • Interval: t5 - t6 Constant jerk with -rmax...

  • Page 242

    Functions 2.12 Jerk limitation with single-axis interpolation (SOFTA) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.3 Programming Syntax SOFT Functionality The SOFT part-program instruction is used to select the acceleration profile with jerk ...

  • Page 243

    Functions 2.12 Jerk limitation with single-axis interpolation (SOFTA) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 2.12.2 Activation 2.12.2.1 Parameterization Function The function's initial setting and the maximum values are parameterized for spec...

  • Page 244

    Functions 2.13 Path-jerk limitation (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.13 2.13 Path-jerk limitation (channel-specific) 2.13.1 Detailed Description 2.13.1.1 General Information Overview To enable a flexible response to the machining s...

  • Page 245

    Functions 2.13 Path-jerk limitation (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 2.13.3 Programming 2.13.3.1 Maximum path jerk Syntax $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK = jerk value Functionality The path-jerk limitation can be adjusted for the situation by p...

  • Page 246

    Functions 2.14 Path jerk for real-time events (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.14 2.14 Path jerk for real-time events (channel-specific) 2.14.1 Detailed Description 2.14.1.1 General Information Overview So that no compromise has to...

  • Page 247

    Functions 2.14 Path jerk for real-time events (channel-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Programming For the purpose of setting the jerk for real-time events in accordance with the acceleration, the system variables can be set as follows: $AC_...

  • Page 248

    Functions 2.15 Jerk with programmed rapid traverse (G00) (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.15 2.15 Jerk with programmed rapid traverse (G00) (axis-specific) 2.15.1 Detailed Description 2.15.1.1 General Information Overview Frequently, ...

  • Page 249

    Functions 2.16 Excessive jerk for block transitions without constant curvature (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 2.15.3 Programming Programmability The function is not programmable. 2.16 2.16 Excessive jerk for block transitions without ...

  • Page 250

    Functions 2.17 Jerk filter (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.16.3 Programming Programmability The function is not programmable. 2.17 2.17 Jerk filter (axis-specific) 2.17.1 Detailed Description 2.17.1.1 General Information Overview In ...

  • Page 251

    Functions 2.17 Jerk filter (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Mode: Sliding mean value generation Where minimal contour deviations are required, filter time constants within the range of 20-40 ms can be set using the "sliding mean va...

  • Page 252

    Functions 2.17 Jerk filter (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Bandstop filter with additional amplitude response increase/decrease at high frequencies In this case, the numerator and denominator natural frequencies are set to different va...

  • Page 253

    Functions 2.17 Jerk filter (axis-specific) Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Mode 3 There are 2 parameterization options for the bandstop filter: • "Real bandstop filter": When identical numerator and denominator natural frequencies are sele...

  • Page 254

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.17.3 Programming Programmability The function is not programmable. 2.18 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 2.18.1 Detailed Description 2.18.1....

  • Page 255

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Simulation of torque characteristic For the purpose of simulating the torque characteristic of the motor characteristic curve, the machine data: MD35242 $MA_AC...

  • Page 256

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Linear characteristic Figure 2-8 Acceleration and velocity characteristic with acceleration reduction: 2 = linear The key data for the characteristic curves e...

  • Page 257

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 Note Machine axes featuring stepper motor and DC drive can be interpolated together. 2.18.1.3 Substitute characteristic curve Function If the programmed pat...

  • Page 258

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Substitute characteristic curve with curved path sections In the case of curved path sections, normal and tangential acceleration are considered together. The ...

  • Page 259

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Figure 2-11 Deceleration with LookAhead 1: Brake application point 2: Torque decrease zone 3: Maximum torque zone vred: Creep velocity vmax: Maximum velocity...

  • Page 260

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.18.2.2 Commissioning Function The knee-shaped acceleration characteristic curve is activated for a specific machine axis using the machine data: MD35240 $MA_...

  • Page 261

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Dependencies If the knee-shaped acceleration characteristic curve is parameterized for a machine axis, then this becomes the default acceleration profile for ...

  • Page 262

    Functions 2.18 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 263

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 3.1 Acceleration and jerk There are no other supplementary conditions to note. 3.2 3.2 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 3.2.1 Active kinematic transformation Key statement The kn...

  • Page 264

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 265

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 4.1 Acceleration 4.1.1 Path velocity characteristic Key statement An excerpt from a part program is provided below, together with the associated acceleration characteristic, by way of an example. These are u...

  • Page 266

    Examples 4.2 Jerk Acceleration (B2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 4-1 Switching between path acceleration specified during preprocessing and real-time acceleration Acceleration profile: BRISK 1: Accelerate to 100% of path velocity (F10000) in accordance with...

  • Page 267

    Examples 4.2 Jerk Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 Part program (excerpt, schematic) ; Setting of path acceleration and path jerk in the event of external intervention: N0100 $AC_PATHACC = 0. N0200 $AC_PATHJERK = 4. * ($MA_MAX_AX_JERK[X] + $MA_MAX_AX_J...

  • Page 268

    Examples 4.3 Acceleration and jerk Acceleration (B2) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4.3 4.3 Acceleration and jerk Key statement In the following example a short part program is used to illustrate the velocity and acceleration characteristic for the X-axis. It also show...

  • Page 269

    Examples 4.4 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-5 Figure 4-4 X axis: Velocity and acceleration characteristic 4.4 4.4 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 4.4.1 Activation Key statement The example given...

  • Page 270

    Examples 4.4 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve Acceleration (B2) 4-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Machine data • Parameterizing the characteristic curve (example only) X axis MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT[X] = 0.4 MD35230 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTO...

  • Page 271

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES Initial setting of G groups 20500 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME Minimum time with constant velocity ...

  • Page 272

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Acceleration (B2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 35230 ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR Acceleration reduction factor 35240 ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE "DRIVE" acceleration characteristic curve: ON/OFF 35242 ACCEL_RE...

  • Page 273

    Acceleration (B2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $AC_PATHA 232,CC, 2-12, 247,2-27 $AC_PATHJERK, 246,2-26, 247,2-27 $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL, 230,2-10 $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK, 245,2-25 $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL, 230,2-10 $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK, 245,2-25 A AC...

  • Page 274

    Index Acceleration (B2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 275

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Diagnostic tools (D1) 317,______________ 281,______________ 279,______________ 319,______________ 321,______________ 279,Brief description 279, 279, 279,1 281,Detailed description 281, 281,2 317,Constraints 317, 317,3 319,Examples 319, 319, 3...

  • Page 276

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 277

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 279,1-1 2 Detailed description ................

  • Page 278

    Table of contents Diagnostic tools (D1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 279

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1Diagnostic tools Integrated and external diagnostic tools are available for operating the SINUMERIK control. In addition, the NC assists with error delimitation for drive problems by providing the o...

  • Page 280

    Brief description Diagnostic tools (D1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 External diagnostic tools The 611D commissioning software (to be installed on an external computer) is used to configure and set parameters for SIMODRIVE 611-D drives. The 611D commissioning soft...

  • Page 281

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 Description of diagnostic tools Scope The Function Manual deals with displays of the user interface, system functions, procedures for determining system statuses and, if necessary, measur...

  • Page 282

    Detailed description 2.1 Description of diagnostic tools Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Alarm handler Application The alarm handler provides an infrastructure for activating and managing alarms on the NCK. Functions • Buffering of a maximum of ...

  • Page 283

    Detailed description 2.1 Description of diagnostic tools Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Compatibility As of SW 4 As of SW 4.1 and later, it is possible to set the channelspecific signal CHANNEL_NOREADY in the VDI interface in response to alarms. U...

  • Page 284

    Detailed description 2.2 Service displays Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2 2.2 Service displays Conditions of use Conditions for the use of service displays are specified. Service displays are differentiated between in terms of axis/spindle, dri...

  • Page 285

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.3 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Values and statuses Displays showing values and statuses on the control's user interface allow the operating status of the ax...

  • Page 286

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-1 Example for service axis/spindle HMI Advanced Following error The difference between the position setpoint and the actual position value of active mea...

  • Page 287

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Servo gain factor (calculated) The servo gain factor in the display is calculated by the NC according to the following equation: Velocity setpoint = setpoint cu...

  • Page 288

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Velocity actual value of active encoder (only 840Di) Display of velocity actual value of the currently active encoder. Velocity setpoint of drive (only 840Di) Dis...

  • Page 289

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Position offset for master axis/spindle actual value The currently applicable position offset value is displayed here (relative to the actual value) if such a pos...

  • Page 290

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 "Referenced" status display Status display for reference point approach (axis). Bit0=Status 0: The machine axis is not cross-referenced using positio...

  • Page 291

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Safe actual position of the axis Displays the current actual axis position that has been measured via the NC. This actual position should correspond in value to ...

  • Page 292

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Control technology concept The figure below shows at which points in the controlloop the axis and spindle information is read off. Figure 2-2 Overview diagram o...

  • Page 293

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Checks Check of the position controller setting The position controller settings can be easily managed via the service axis display. The number 1 (corresponds to...

  • Page 294

    Detailed description 2.3 Axis/spindle service display Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • "Positioning monitoring" ⇒ following error > MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) • "Measuring system changeover not availabl...

  • Page 295

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 2.4 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Displays Displays on the control's user interface that show values and statuses allow ...

  • Page 296

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Service HMI Advanced Drive Descriptions on how to select and operate the "Diagnostics" area can be found in: References: /BAD/ Opera...

  • Page 297

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Setup mode (terminal 112) HMI SW 6.3 and later The display corresponds to the status of terminal 112 on the SIMODRIVE 611 digital infeed/regen...

  • Page 298

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Enable pulses Message indicating whether the drive pulses have been enabled. State 0: The drive module pulses are suppressed. The axis/spindl...

  • Page 299

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 ZK1 Messages Display indicates whether messages of status class 1 are active. State 0: No status class 1 message is active. State 1: One or se...

  • Page 300

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Speed setpoint filter 1 Status display of speed setpoint smoothing function. State 0: No speed setpoint smoothing is active. State 1: Smoothi...

  • Page 301

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Setup mode Mode display of the SIMODRIVE 611 digital. State 0: Normal mode is active for the drive. State 1: Setup mode is active for the driv...

  • Page 302

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Motor selection (star/delta) Display indicating which motor data set is to be activated by the PLC. At the moment the motor data record is us...

  • Page 303

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Power section in i²t limitation HMI SW 6.3 and later Limitation for protecting the power section against continuous overloading of the SIMODR...

  • Page 304

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Ramp-up function completed Status display of drive. State 0: The ramp-up function has not yet been completed after a new speed setpoint was d...

  • Page 305

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Speed lower than threshold setting Status display of drive. State 0: The actual speed value is greater than the threshold speed. Status 1: The...

  • Page 306

    Detailed description 2.4 Drive service display (for digital drives only) Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD1620 $MD_PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS (Bits variable signal function) MD1621 $MD_PROG_SIGNAL_NR (Signal number variable signal function) MD1622 $MD_PR...

  • Page 307

    Detailed description 2.5 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 2.5 2.5 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di The user interface 840Di StartUp provides diagnostic screen forms for PROFIBUS DP and its nodes. . These diagnost...

  • Page 308

    Detailed description 2.5 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-1 Diagnostic screen PROFIBUS Configuration Function/subfunction Explanation/meaning Bus configuration Baud rate in MBd Data transfer rate Cycle tim...

  • Page 309

    Detailed description 2.5 Service display PROFIBUS DP 840Di Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Detailed information of the slots within a slave The Details button opens the diagnostics dialog box Detailed information on the slave. This screen form pro...

  • Page 310

    Detailed description 2.6 Communication log Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-4 Diagnostic screen AxisInfo Function/subfunction Explanation/meaning Machine axes Name of the axis defined in the NC machine data Output Slave/slot Configured ass...

  • Page 311

    Detailed description 2.7 PLC status Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Logbook The logbook display selected by means of soft key Logbook in the "Diagnostics" operating area automatically lists details of all alterations to the control that ...

  • Page 312

    Detailed description 2.8 Other diagnostics tools Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Status display The status of the following data can be displayed on the operator panel. • Interface signals from the machine control panel • Interface signals to ...

  • Page 313

    Detailed description 2.9 Identifying defective drive modules Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Archiving of data The PCIN software package can be used to archive machine data, setting data, part programs, etc. A description of how to use this can b...

  • Page 314

    Detailed description 2.9 Identifying defective drive modules Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Remove drive module at NC end A drive module (SIMODRIVE 611 digital) specified in an alarm text must be removed from the bus: 1. Remove the module from th...

  • Page 315

    Detailed description 2.9 Identifying defective drive modules Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Table 2-5 Bus configuration example Module Drive no. Active Type Module type Power section code 1 10 1 ARM/MSD Axis 6 Left 1 1 SRM/FDD Axis 14 Right 2 1 ...

  • Page 316

    Detailed description 2.9 Identifying defective drive modules Diagnostic tools (D1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 317

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Constraints 3No supplementary conditions apply.

  • Page 318

    Constraints Diagnostic tools (D1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 319

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 320

    Examples Diagnostic tools (D1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 321

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Drive-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MD_ Description 1401 MOTOR_MAX_SPEED Speed for max. useful motor speed 1417 SPEED_THRESHOLD_X nx for 'nact < nx' signal 1418 S...

  • Page 322

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Diagnostic tools (D1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.1.2 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK Mask for suppressing special alarms 11411 ENABLE_ALARM_MASK Activation of special alarms 11412...

  • Page 323

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 5.3 5.3 Signals 5.3.1 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 16.0 - 16.2 Actual gear stages A, B, C 31, ... 21.0 - 21.2 Parameter set selection A, B, C 31, ... 21.3 - ...

  • Page 324

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Diagnostic tools (D1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 325

    Diagnostic tools (D1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index 6 611D commissioning tool, 312,2-31 A Axis/spindle service display, 285,2-5 C Communication log, 310,2-29 D DB31, ... 289,DBX16.0, 2-9 289, 289,DBX16.1, 2-9 289, 289,DBX16.2, 2-9 289, 300,DBX20.3, 2-2...

  • Page 326

    Index Diagnostic tools (D1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD36210 $MA_CTRLOUT_ 293,LIMIT, 2-13 293, MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ 294,_LIMIT, 2-14 MD36400 $MA_CONTOUR_TOL, 293,2-13 293, MD36500 $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL, 294,2-14 MD37010 $MA_FIXED_STOP_TORQ 290,UE_DEF, 2-10 290...

  • Page 327

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Travel to fixed stop (F1) 331,______________ 333,______________ 369,______________ 371,______________ 373,______________ 331,Brief Description 331, 331,1 333,Detailed Description 333, 333,2 369,Supplementary conditions 369, 369, 369,3 371,Examp...

  • Page 328

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 329

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 331,1-1 2 Detailed Description.............

  • Page 330

    Table of contents Travel to fixed stop (F1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 331

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Customer benefit The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used for operations such as traversing tailstocks or sleeves to an end limit position in order to clamp workpieces. Features...

  • Page 332

    Brief Description Travel to fixed stop (F1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 333

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed Description 22.1 2.1 General functionality 2.1.1 Functional sequence, programming, parameterization Programming Travel to fixed stop is selected or deselected with the following commands: FXS[Machine axis...

  • Page 334

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The FXST and FXSW commands are optional. The travel path and the command which activates that function must be programmed in one block (exception: Synchronized actio...

  • Page 335

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Functional sequence The function is explained by the example below (sleeve is pressed onto workpiece). Figure 2-1 Example of travel to fixed stop Selection The NC r...

  • Page 336

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Fixed stop reached As soon as the axis comes into contact with the mechanical fixed stop (workpiece), the closedloop control in the drive raises the torque so that t...

  • Page 337

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Monitoring window If a fixed stop monitoring window has not been programmed in the block or has not been programmed since the start of the program, the value entered...

  • Page 338

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Abort without alarm Travel to fixed stop can be aborted by the PLC in the starting block without triggering an alarm (for example, when the operator presses a button...

  • Page 339

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Deselection The NC recognizes the function deselection via programming of the command FXS[x]=0. Then an advance stop (STOPRE) is internally released, since it can't ...

  • Page 340

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Terminal 663 with MD37002 controllable With the machine data: MD37002 $MA_FIXED_STOP_CONTROL the response to pulse disabling on the stop is controllable. Deleting ...

  • Page 341

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Function abort A function abort can be triggered by the following events: • EMERGENCY STOP: – With an 840D control, the NC and drive are disconnected from the su...

  • Page 342

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block search without calculation The commands FXS, FXST and FXSW are ignored. FOC FOCON/FOCOF is activated modally. It is already active in the approach block. SERU...

  • Page 343

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 $AA_FXS and $VA_FXS In SW 6.2 and higher, the meaning of system variable $AA_FXS is redefined for SERUPRO only and completely replaced by variable $VA_FXS. Variable...

  • Page 344

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 $AA_FXS Simulate axis traversal System variable $AA_FXS displays the current status of program simulation "program-sensitive system variable." Example: If...

  • Page 345

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 REPOS display Offset Once the search target has been found, the FXS status active on the machine is displayed for each axis via the axial VDI signals: IS DB31, ... ...

  • Page 346

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Caution FXS-REPOS moves all path axes in a path grouping to the target position. Axes with and without FXS treatment thus traverse together with the G code and fe...

  • Page 347

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 If FXST[x] and FXSW[x] are not programmed, the default settings from the machine data: MD37010 $MA_FIXED_STOP_TORQUE_DEF and MD37020 $MA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF are ...

  • Page 348

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Query of the system variable in the parts program initiates a block search stop. As a result of the status query in the parts program, it is possible, for example, ...

  • Page 349

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Vertical axes The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used for vertical axes even when alarms are active. Should the traversal of vertical axes be abo...

  • Page 350

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.5 Supplementary conditions for expansions Response to pulse blocking The cancellation of the pulse enable, either by terminal 663 or by IS DB31, ... DBX21.7 (&q...

  • Page 351

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Note Travel to fixed stop can be canceled by disabling pulses from IS " DB31, ... DBX21.7 ("Pulse enable") or Terminal 663, if: MD37002 $MA_FIXED_ST...

  • Page 352

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Selection of FXS with G64 In the machine data: MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK bit 0 must = 0 (do not wait for PLC input signal "travel to fixed stop active&...

  • Page 353

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Programming The programming of the axis is carried out in square brackets. The following are permissible: • Geometry axis identifiers • Channel axis identifiers...

  • Page 354

    Detailed Description 2.1 General functionality Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Determine torque limit status The system variables $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT can be used at any time to read in systems with digital drives (FDD, MSD, HLA) whether the cu...

  • Page 355

    Detailed Description 2.2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 2.2 2.2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives 2.2.1 SIMODRIVE 611 digital (VSA/HSA) Selection The NC recognizes the "Travel to fixed stop&q...

  • Page 356

    Detailed Description 2.2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Fixed stop is not reached If the programmed end position is reached without the "Fixed stop reached" status being recognized, then the t...

  • Page 357

    Detailed Description 2.2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Terminal 663 with MD37002 controllable With the machine parameter: MD37002 FIXED_STOP_CONTROL the response to pulse blocking on the fixed stop is...

  • Page 358

    Detailed Description 2.2 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ** acceleration appropriate > 10 ms with 611-A (VSA)Changeovert Figure 2-3 Diagram for FXS with a digital drive (611 digital)

  • Page 359

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 2.2.2 Travel to fixed stop with hydraulic drives SIMODRIVE 611 digital (HLA module) Velocity/force control If the function FXS (FXS[x]=1) is activ...

  • Page 360

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programmable clamping torque In this case, the PLC switches the drive actuator from speedcontrolled into currentcontrolled operation as soon as th...

  • Page 361

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Fixed stop reached As soon as the axis reaches the fixed stop, the axial contour deviation increases. If the recorded threshold in the machine par...

  • Page 362

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Deselection The NC detects that the function has been deselected on the basis of commandFXS[x]=0 and specifies a speed or current setpoint of &quo...

  • Page 363

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Selection The NC detects that the function "travel to fixed stop" is selected via the command FXS[x]=1 and signals the PLC via the IS &q...

  • Page 364

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 If a programmable clamping torque input (via FXST[x] or setting parameter) is required from the NC, then the PLC must switch the drive over from s...

  • Page 365

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Depending on the machine parameter: MD37060 FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK the NC waits for the PLC to acknowledge by resetting IS "Activate travel to...

  • Page 366

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 FXS selection (fixed stop is not reached) The following diagram shows the sequence of the following error and interface signals for "FXS sele...

  • Page 367

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 FXS deselection The following diagram shows the sequence of the following error and interface signals for "FXS Deselection" on analog dr...

  • Page 368

    Detailed Description 2.3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives Travel to fixed stop (F1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 369

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 370

    Supplementary conditions Travel to fixed stop (F1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 371

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4Static synchronized actions Travel to fixed stop (FXS), initiated by a synchronized action. N10 IDS=1 WHENEVER ; Activate static synchronized action: (($R1==1) AND ; By the setting of $R1=1 ($AA_FXS[Y]=...

  • Page 372

    Examples Travel to fixed stop (F1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Multiple selection A selection may only be carried out once. If the function is called once more due to faulty programming (FXS[Axis]=1) the alarm 20092 "Travel to fixed stop still active" is...

  • Page 373

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 36042 FOC_STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME Delay time 0 monitoring with FOC and FXS 37000 FIXED_STOP_MODE Travel t...

  • Page 374

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Travel to fixed stop (F1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.2 5.2 Setting data 5.2.1 Axis/spindle-specific setting data Number Identifier: $SA_ Description 43500 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH Selection of travel to fixed stop 43510 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW Cla...

  • Page 375

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 5.3.2 Signals from axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 60.4 Referenced/synchronized 1 31, ... 60.5 Referenced/synchronized 2 31, ... 62.5 Fixed stop reached 31, ... 92.0 S...

  • Page 376

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Travel to fixed stop (F1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 377

    Travel to fixed stop (F1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index B Block-related limit (FOC), 352,2-20 C Channel axis identifiers with FXS, 333,2-1 F FXS REPOS, 345,2-13 M MD10 349,12, 2-17, 350,2-18 MD11 347,03, 2-15 MD11 347,04, 2-15 MD11 347,05, 2-15 MD11 333,1...

  • Page 378

    Index Travel to fixed stop (F1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 379

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 383,______________ 385,______________ 459,______________ 461,______________ 463,______________ 383,Brief description 383, 383, 383,1 385,Detailed description 385, 385,2 459,Suppl...

  • Page 380

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 381

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description.........................................................................................................................................

  • Page 382

    Table of contents Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 383

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1The description of functions explains how to parameterize a machine axis in relation to: • Actual-value/measuring systems • Setpoint system • Oper...

  • Page 384

    Brief description Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 385

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies 2.1.1 Velocities Maximum path and axis velocities and spindle speed The maximum path and axis veloc...

  • Page 386

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 For setting the interpolation cycle, see: References: /FB3/ Function Manual, Special Functions; Cycle T...

  • Page 387

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Example: MD10200 $MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM = 1000 [incr. /mm]; Interpolation cycle = 12 ms; ⇒ Vmin = 10 -3/...

  • Page 388

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-1 Traversing ranges of axes G71 [mm, degrees] G70 [inch, degrees] Range Range Linear axes X, Y...

  • Page 389

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.4 Block diagram of resolutions and scaling values Block diagram of units and resolutions

  • Page 390

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 This diagram shows how input values are converted into internal units. It also shows the following co...

  • Page 391

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 It is independent of the input/display resolution but should have at least the same resolution. The m...

  • Page 392

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Physical quantity: Input/output units for standard basic system: Metric Inch Linear acceleration 1 m...

  • Page 393

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 The following applies: Selected input/output unit = MD10230 * internal unit The selected input/output...

  • Page 394

    Detailed description 2.1 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example 1: Machine data input/output of the linear velocities is to be in m/min instead of mm/min (ini...

  • Page 395

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.2 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system 2.2.1 General The control system can operate with the inch or the metric syste...

  • Page 396

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.2 Conversion of basic system by parts program Conversion factor The factor for the inch to metric conversion fo...

  • Page 397

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Application: With this function it is possible, for example, with a metric basic system, to machine an inch thread ...

  • Page 398

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Examples: Both parts programs are implemented with a metric setting with: MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC=1. ...

  • Page 399

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Example 2: The definition is made here by programming G71 in the synchronized action. N100 R1=0 N110 G0 X0 Z0 ...

  • Page 400

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Range G70/G71 G700/G710 GUD G/G G/G LUD G/G G/G PUD G/G G/G R parameters G/G G/G Siemens cycles P/P P/P...

  • Page 401

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Note The availability of the soft key and, therefore, its functionality, can be configured using the compatibility...

  • Page 402

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The user is prompted to take the current valid measuring system: MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC into account....

  • Page 403

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 JOG and handwheel factor Machine data: MD31090 $MA_JOG_INCR_WEIGHT consists of two values, which contain the axial ...

  • Page 404

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Rounding machine data All length-related machine data are rounded to the nearest 1 pm when writing in the inch meas...

  • Page 405

    Detailed description 2.2 Metric/inch measuring system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Note The FGREF factor also works if only rotary axes are programmed in the block. The normal F value interpretatio...

  • Page 406

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ; Path=10 mm ; R8=0.288 s approx. N300 FGREF[A]=360/(2*$PI) ; Set 1 degree=1 inch via the effective radius N310 D...

  • Page 407

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Setpoint output A setpoint can be output for each axis/spindle. Setpoints are output digitally to the actuator on S...

  • Page 408

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 This tolerance setting must not be exceeded during cyclical comparison of the two measuring systems or an error mes...

  • Page 409

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 2.3.2 Speed setpoint and actual-value routing General information In order to carry out speed setpoint and actual-v...

  • Page 410

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index of MD for speed setpoint routing The index [n] of the machine data for setpoint routing is coded with 0 for s...

  • Page 411

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Actual-value routing For actual-value routing, the following actual-value assignments for parameterizing the associ...

  • Page 412

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD30240 $MA_ENC_TYPE[n] (type of actual-value acquisition): Enter the encoder type used here. MD30242 $MA_ENC_IS_...

  • Page 413

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Figure 2-2 Example of setpoint/actual-value routing Special features of SINUMERIK 840D/810D with SIMODRIVE 611 dig...

  • Page 414

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Motor measurement channel X414 Pulse interface X304 Measurement channel no. 6 should be assigned to machine axis &...

  • Page 415

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 2.3.3 Configuration of drives SINUMERIK 840D/810D with SIMODRIVE 611 digital SINUMERIK 840D/810D with 611D drive b...

  • Page 416

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SINUMERIK 840Di with SIMODRIVE 611 universal SINUMERIK 840Di With PROFIBUS DP When a SINUMERIK 840Di is operated ...

  • Page 417

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Local position of gear unit/encoder == Figure 2-4 Gear unit types and encoder locations Motor/load gear The motor/l...

  • Page 418

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Caution Unlike the motor/load gear, there is no parameter set for the intermediate gear and, therefore, no way of...

  • Page 419

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Caution The control cannot detect all possible situations that can lead to loss of the machine position reference...

  • Page 420

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SINUMERIK 840D with PROFIBUS DP It is necessary to change machine data: MD32250 $MA_RATED_OUTVAL[n] (rated output v...

  • Page 421

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 Maximum speed setpoint With SINUMERIK 840D/810D, the maximum speed setpoint is the largest value, which can be outp...

  • Page 422

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note For more information about setpoint adjustment for SIMODRIVE digital drives, see: References: /IAD/Installat...

  • Page 423

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Machine data Linear axis Linear axis Rotary axis Linear scale/ or as direct measuring system Encoder on motor En...

  • Page 424

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Coding of the machine data The indices of the following machine data are encoder-coded [encoder no.]: encoder 0 or ...

  • Page 425

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Note These machine data can be activated in parts programs with the command NEWCONF or via the HMI operator panel ...

  • Page 426

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Linear axis with linear scale Figure 2-6 Linear axis with linear scale In order to adapt the actual-value resoluti...

  • Page 427

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 In order to adapt the actual-value resolution to the calculation resolution, the control calculates the quotients f...

  • Page 428

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Result: 1 encoder increment corresponds to 0.004768 increments of the internal unit. In practice, the available enc...

  • Page 429

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor Figure 2-9 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor In order to adapt the...

  • Page 430

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD31060 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA[0] = 5 MD31050 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM[0] = 1 MD10210 $MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG ...

  • Page 431

    Detailed description 2.3 Setpoint/actual-value system Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 Intermediate gear encoder on tool Figure 2-11 Intermediate gear with encoder directly on the rotating tool In orde...

  • Page 432

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4 2.4 Closed-loop control 2.4.1 General Position control of an axis/spindle The closed-loop control of an axis consists of...

  • Page 433

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 For a description of the feedforward control, backlash, friction compensation with further machine data, and leadscrew error...

  • Page 434

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 [m/min]/[mm]: Unit of servo gain factor (KV) according to VDI standard Servo gain factor (Kv-) setting for SINUMERIK 840D...

  • Page 435

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 Example of dynamic response adaptation of axes 1, 2 and 3 (without speed feedforward control): The equivalent time constant...

  • Page 436

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note If a geometry axis is subject to dynamic response adaptation, the same dynamic behavior is also required of all other ...

  • Page 437

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 Tapping or thread cutting The following applies to parameter sets for axes: • For machine axes not involved in tapping or...

  • Page 438

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Functionality To optimize closed-loop control during startup, these codable parameter sets support practiceoriented startup ...

  • Page 439

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 Advantages • The indirect switchover of a single function: (e.g. MD32452 not 1) The parameter set-dependent function is on...

  • Page 440

    Detailed description 2.4 Closed-loop control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example Effects of various parameter sets with backlash compensation: MD32450 $MA_BACKLASH[AX1] = 0.01 MD32452 $MA_BACKLA...

  • Page 441

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 2.5 2.5 Optimization of the control 2.5.1 Position controller: injection of positional deviation Application The sta...

  • Page 442

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The weighting of machine data: MD32950 $MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING can be set on the basis of step responses, for exa...

  • Page 443

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 • Setting the filter time to zero and setting the feedforward control factor to a value less than 100% • Sacrifi...

  • Page 444

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Control response with POWER ON, RESET, REPOS, etc. In the case of POWER ON and RESET, as well as with "Enable m...

  • Page 445

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 Recommended setting in case of recommissioning If recommissioning, or if previous standard values are loaded (switch...

  • Page 446

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Magnifying MD32810 Magnifying the value in machine data: MD32810 $MA_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME slows the axis down and in...

  • Page 447

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 Different servo gain values (KV) usually point to the following: • The gear ratios do not match in one or several ...

  • Page 448

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The setting of the feedforward control must be the same for all axes of an interpolation group. Setting the e...

  • Page 449

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 In this case, the torque feedforward control with X1 is enabled continuously, also in JOG mode. MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RE...

  • Page 450

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Advantages The filter available since software version 1, which is set via: MD32400 $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE = 1 and MD324...

  • Page 451

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 Fine adjustment The fine adjustment of the position setpoint filter is carried out as follows: 1. Assess the travers...

  • Page 452

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.4 Position control with proportional-plus-integral-action controller Function In the default scenario, the core ...

  • Page 453

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 3. Activate the position control loop as a proportional-plus-integral-action controller by setting the following mac...

  • Page 454

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-14 Following error (1), actual velocity (2), position actual value (3), position setpoint (4)

  • Page 455

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 2.5.5 System variable for status of pulse enable Application For all applications that must quickly react to pulse e...

  • Page 456

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example Output of the pulse enable of machine axis X1 to the first digital NCK output in all modes IDS = 1 DO $A_OUT...

  • Page 457

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 Advantages Compared with the existing method "deceleration axes", the expansion of the position controller...

  • Page 458

    Detailed description 2.5 Optimization of the control Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Supplementary conditions The functional expansion is available for all control variants. The low-pass filter is only...

  • Page 459

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3No supplementary conditions apply.

  • Page 460

    Supplementary conditions Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 461

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 462

    Examples Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 463

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Memory specific machine data Number Identifier: $MM_ Description 9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION Display resolution 9010 SPIND_DISPLAY_RESO...

  • Page 464

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 13000 DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[n] Drive activation 13010 DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[n] Logical drive number 13020 DRIVE_INVERTE...

  • Page 465

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 31020 ENC_RESOL[n] Encoder pulses per revolution 31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH Leadscrew pitch 31040 ENC_IS_DIRECT...

  • Page 466

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT Maximum spindle speed 36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT [n] Threshold value for velocity monitori...

  • Page 467

    Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $AC_TIME, 406,2-22 $VA_DPE, 455,2-70 A Actual-value acquisition, 406,2-23 Actual-value correction, 408,2-25 Actual-value processing, 419,2-35, 437,2-53, ...

  • Page 468

    Index Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD10200, 386,2-2, 387,2-3, 391,2-7, 402,2-18, 427,2-43 MD10210, 386,2-2, 387,2-3, 391,2-7, 430,2-46 MD10220, 390,2-6, 392,2-8 MD10230, 390,2-6, 392...

  • Page 469

    Index Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 Position control 431,loop, 2-47 Positioning accuracy, 388,2-4 Positioning axes, 387,2-3 PROFIBUS DP, 416,2-32 Pulse multiplication factor, 425,2-41 R Resolu...

  • Page 470

    Index Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) Index-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 471

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 475,______________ 483,______________ 521,______________ 525,______________ 529,______________ 475,Brief description 475, 475, 475,1 483,Detailed description 483, 483,2 521,Supplementary conditions 521, 521,...

  • Page 472

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 473

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 475,1-1 1.1 Function ..........

  • Page 474

    Table of contents Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3 Supplementary conditions....................................................................................................................... 521,3-1 3.1 General constraints .......

  • Page 475

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 11.1 1.1 Function General Auxiliary functions permit activation of the system functions of NC and PLC user functions. Auxiliary functions can be programmed in part program blocks in t...

  • Page 476

    Brief description 1.1 Function Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The spindle function M3 (spindle right) is predefined for the master spindle of a channel. If a 2nd spindle is assigned to a channel, a corresponding user-defined auxili...

  • Page 477

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-3 1.2 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions M functions M (special function) Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning N...

  • Page 478

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 1-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 – MD10815 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME – MD20094 $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR – MD20095 $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR – MD20096 $MC_T_M_...

  • Page 479

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-5 Comments • H-function-specific machine data: MD22110 $MC_AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT (type of H-auxiliary function is an integer) MD22230 $MC_AUXFU_H_SYNC_...

  • Page 480

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 1-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Comments • Initial setting: D1 • After a tool change, the default tool cut can be parameterized via: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT (Basic p...

  • Page 481

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-7 F functions F (feedrate) Address extension Value Value range Meaning Value range Type Meaning Number8) - - - - - - 0.001 - 999 999.999 REAL Pat...

  • Page 482

    Brief description 1.2 Overview of auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 1-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Footnotes 1) If tool management is active, neither a T change signal nor a T word is output to the interface (channel). 2) The type for the value...

  • Page 483

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions 2.1.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Function Predefined auxiliary functions are auxiliary functions for activating system functions. The as...

  • Page 484

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Predefined auxiliary functions System function Index n (index for the machine data of the parameters of an auxiliary function) Type: MD22050...

  • Page 485

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Nibbling 29 M 0 26 6) (12) (0) (0) (1) (0) 0 (0) (0) 0 1 Nibbling 30 M 0 122 6) (11) (0) (0) (1) (0) 0 (0) (0) 0 1 Nibbling 31 M 0 125 6) (11) (...

  • Page 486

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.3 Parameter: Type, address extension, and value Function A predefined auxiliary function is programmed via the parameters: • Type MD22050 ...

  • Page 487

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Grouping together auxiliary functions To assign an auxiliary function for all spindles of a channel to the same auxiliary function group, the va...

  • Page 488

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Bit0: Output duration one OB1 cycle (normal acknowledgment) An auxiliary function with normal acknowledgment is output to the NC/PLC interface ...

  • Page 489

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Bit3: No output The auxiliary function is not output to the PLC. Bit4: Spindle response following acknowledgment The corresponding spindle funct...

  • Page 490

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Output during motion • The auxiliary functions are output at the beginning of the traverse movements (path and/or positioning axis movements)....

  • Page 491

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Figure 2-1 Output behavior 1

  • Page 492

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-2 Output behavior 2

  • Page 493

    Detailed description 2.1 Predefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Figure 2-3 Output behavior 3

  • Page 494

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions 2.2.1 User-specific and extended predefined auxiliary functions Function There are two uses for user-d...

  • Page 495

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Extension of predefined auxiliary functions refers to the "address extensions" parameter. The number of the spindle that the auxilia...

  • Page 496

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.4 User-specific auxiliary functions Function User-specific auxiliary functions have the following characteristics: • User-specific auxil...

  • Page 497

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Parameter: Type The name of an auxiliary function is defined via the "type". The identifiers for user-defined auxiliary functions ar...

  • Page 498

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.5.3 Parameter: Output behavior Function The "output behavior" of user-defined auxiliary functions can be parameterized via the ...

  • Page 499

    Detailed description 2.2 Userdefined auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 • Output behavior: – Output duration one OB1 cycle (normal acknowledgment) – Spindle response following acknowledgment – Output during...

  • Page 500

    Detailed description 2.3 Type-specific output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3 2.3 Type-specific output behavior Function The output behavior of the auxiliary function relative to a traverse motion programmed in the par...

  • Page 501

    Detailed description 2.3 Type-specific output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Example Output of auxiliary functions with different output behaviors in a part program block with traverse movement. Parameterized output behav...

  • Page 502

    Detailed description 2.4 Programmable output duration Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4 2.4 Programmable output duration Function User-specific auxiliary functions, for which the output behavior "Output duration of an OB1 cy...

  • Page 503

    Detailed description 2.5 Priorities of the output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Figure 2-5 Example of auxiliary function output 2.5 2.5 Priorities of the output behavior Areas of the output behavior The priority must be...

  • Page 504

    Detailed description 2.5 Priorities of the output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Area: Output relative to motion The following rules apply to output relative to motion: Priority Output behavior Defined via: Highest Speci...

  • Page 505

    Detailed description 2.6 Auxiliary function output to the PLC Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 2.6 2.6 Auxiliary function output to the PLC Function On output of an auxiliary function to the PLC, the following signals and values are...

  • Page 506

    Detailed description 2.7 Programming Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7 2.7 Programming Syntax An auxiliary function is programmed in a part program block with the following syntax: < type > [ < address extension > = ]...

  • Page 507

    Detailed description 2.8 Auxiliary functions without block change delay Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Programming examples Programming examples of auxiliary functions with the corresponding values for output to the PLC. Programm...

  • Page 508

    Detailed description 2.9 Associated auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9 2.9 Associated auxiliary functions Function Associated auxiliary functions are user-defined auxiliary functions that have the same effect a...

  • Page 509

    Detailed description 2.9 Associated auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 NC/PLC interface signals In the case of an associated user-defined auxiliary function, the same signals are output to the NC/PLC interface as f...

  • Page 510

    Detailed description 2.10 M function with implicit preprocessing stop Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.10 2.10 M function with implicit preprocessing stop Function Triggering a preprocessing stop in conjunction with an auxiliary f...

  • Page 511

    Detailed description 2.11 Response to overstore Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 2.11 2.11 Response to overstore Overstore Before the start, on the SINUMERIK operator interface, the following functions: • NC START of a part progra...

  • Page 512

    Detailed description 2.12 Block search Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12 2.12 Block search 2.12.1 Behavior on block search with calculation Function Block searches with calculation collect up auxiliary functions on a groupspecif...

  • Page 513

    Detailed description 2.12 Block search Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Behavior regarding: M19 (position spindle) After block completion, the last spindle positioning command programmed with M19 is always carried out, even if othe...

  • Page 514

    Detailed description 2.12 Block search Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 System variables The spindle-specific auxilary functions are always stored in the following system variables on block search, irrespective of the programming de...

  • Page 515

    Detailed description 2.12 Block search Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Example Block search for contour with suppression of output of the spindle-specific auxiliary functions and start of an ASUB after output of action blocks: MD11...

  • Page 516

    Detailed description 2.12 Block search Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 If a different response is required, the program sequence for block search (for example) "N05 M3 S..." and "N30 SPOS[2] = IC(...)" requires ...

  • Page 517

    Detailed description 2.13 Scan and display of output M-auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 2.13 2.13 Scan and display of output M-auxiliary functions 2.13.1 Information options Information methods Information on the...

  • Page 518

    Detailed description 2.13 Scan and display of output M-auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Miscellaneous Only the group-specific M auxiliary functions are displayed. The block-by-block display is also available, as ...

  • Page 519

    Detailed description 2.13 Scan and display of output M-auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 • Output status of the M auxiliary function of the n+1 group: INT $AC_AUXFU_M_STATE[n] 0: No auxiliary function 1: M-auxil...

  • Page 520

    Detailed description 2.13 Scan and display of output M-auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 521

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 3.1 General constraints Spindle replacement Because the auxiliary functions are parameterized channel-specifically, if function: "spindle replacement" is used, t...

  • Page 522

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3.2 3.2 Output behavior Thread cutting During active thread cutting G33, G34 and G35, the following output behavior is always active for the spindle-specif...

  • Page 523

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-3 Auxiliary function: M1 (conditional stop) Overriding the parameterized output behavior The parameterized output behavior of the auxiliary function M1 is o...

  • Page 524

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Output behavior Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 3-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 525

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 4.1 Defining auxiliary functions Task Parameterization of the auxiliary-function-specific machine data for a machine with the following configuration: Spindles • Spindle 1: Master spind...

  • Page 526

    Examples 4.1 Defining auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The gear stage last programmed is to be output after block search. The following auxiliary functions are assigned to the ninth auxiliary function group fo...

  • Page 527

    Examples 4.1 Defining auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 Parameterization of the machine data The machine data are parameterized by appropriate programming within a part program. Programming Remarks $MN_AUXFU_MAXNU...

  • Page 528

    Examples 4.1 Defining auxiliary functions Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programming Remarks $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE[15] = 70 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP[15] = 10 $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC[10] = 'H22' Specification of auxiliary function g...

  • Page 529

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE M function with preprocessing stop 10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP M function for spindle ...

  • Page 530

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 22040 AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP Predefined auxiliary function groups 22050 AUXFU_PREDEF_TYPE Predefined auxiliary function type 22060 AUXFU_PREDEF_E...

  • Page 531

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 61.4 - 61.6 T function 1 - 3 quick 21, ... 62.0 - 62.2 D function 1 - 3 change 21, ... 62.4 - 62.6 D function 1 - 3 quick 21, ... 63.0 E f...

  • Page 532

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 142 - 145 H function 1 (real format) 21, ... 146 - 147 Extended address of H function 2 (binary) 21, ... 148 - 151 H function 2 (real or d...

  • Page 533

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 5.2.3 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 78 - 81 F function for positioning axis (real) 5.2.4 Signals from axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Descr...

  • Page 534

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 535

    Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $P_SEARCH_S, 514,2-32 $P_SEARCH_S 514,DIR, 2-32 $P_SEARCH_SGEAR, 514,2-32 $P_SEARCH_SPOS, 514,2-32 $P_SEARCH_SPOSMODE, 514,2-32 A Address extension, 506,2-24 Area Output duration, 503...

  • Page 536

    Index Auxiliary Function Output to PLC (H2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD10714, 485,2-3 MD10715, 510,2-28 MD11100, 494,2-12 MD11110, 503,2-21, 504,2-22 MD11450, 513,2-31, 515,2-33 MD20090, 521,3-1 MD20094, 485,2-3 MD20095, 485,2-3 MD20124, 521,3-1 MD...

  • Page 537

    SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 543,______________ 547,______________ 725,______________ 727,______________ 729,______________ 543,Brief description 543, 543, 543,1 547,Detailed description 547, 547,2 725,Supplementa...

  • Page 538

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 539

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 543,1-...

  • Page 540

    Table of contents Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.8.8 REPOS offset in the interface .................................................................................................. 625,2-76 2.6.8.9 Making...

  • Page 541

    Table of contents Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 5 Data lists................................................................................................................................................. 729,...

  • Page 542

    Table of contents Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 543

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1Channel An NC channel represents the smallest unit for manual traversing of axes and automatic processing of part programs. At any one time, a channel will alwa...

  • Page 544

    Brief description Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block search The block search function enables the following program simulations for locating specific program points: • Type 1 without calculation at conto...

  • Page 545

    Brief description Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-3 Basic block display A second socalled basic block display can be used with the existing block display to display all blocks that produce an action on the machi...

  • Page 546

    Brief description Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 1-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 547

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 2.1 Mode group Mode group A mode group contains the channels that are required to run simultaneously in the same mode from the point of view of the machi...

  • Page 548

    Detailed description 2.1 Mode group Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Mode group assignment A mode group is a grouping of one or more channels. Axes and/or spindles are assigned to one channel. Machine data: MD1...

  • Page 549

    Detailed description 2.1 Mode group Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 With SINUMERIK 840D or 840D sl, the following configurations are permissible depending on the HW/SW version: • Up to 12 axes/spindles per ch...

  • Page 550

    Detailed description 2.1 Mode group Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Channel gaps Channels to which a mode group is assigned with machine data: MD10010 $MN_ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP are regarded as activated. ...

  • Page 551

    Detailed description 2.1 Mode group Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.2 Mode group RESET Function A mode group Reset is requested via a mode group-specific NC/PLC interface signal: DB11, ... DBX0.7 = 1 (mode...

  • Page 552

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2 2.2 Mode groups Unique mode The channels of a mode group operate in one mode. A mode group is either in AUTOMATIC, JOG, or MDA mode. Sev...

  • Page 553

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Applies to all modes Cross-mode synchronized actions Modal synchronized actions can be executed per IDS in all modes for the following functi...

  • Page 554

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Global machine function for mode group After mode selection, a machine function can be selected, which is then valid globally for the whole m...

  • Page 555

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Operating statuses The following three channel statuses can occur in each mode: 1. Channel reset The machine is in its initial state. This i...

  • Page 556

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Jog-capable axis means: • The axis is not: – A PLC axis (as a concurrent positioning axis), i.e., the PLC has fetched the axis via axis ...

  • Page 557

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 • While a mode group axis is being traversed in JOG mode, the mode group remains internally in JOG mode. Remark: This phase can begin with...

  • Page 558

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.1 Monitoring functions and interlocks of the individual modes Channel status determines monitoring functions Monitoring functions in op...

  • Page 559

    Detailed description 2.2 Mode groups Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Possible mode changes The following table shows possible mode changes for one channel. Table 2-1 Mode change AUTOMATIC JOG MDA from A...

  • Page 560

    Detailed description 2.3 Channel Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3 2.3 Channel Assignment of programs Part programs are assigned to channels. Programs of different channels are largely independent of each ot...

  • Page 561

    Detailed description 2.3 Channel Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Channel configuration The channels can be assigned individual channel names via machine data: MD20000 $MC_CHAN_NAME (channel name) . The vario...

  • Page 562

    Detailed description 2.3 Channel Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Interface signals NCK channel 1 signals lie in DB21 of the user interface, those of channel 2 in DB22. The channel or channels can be monitored ...

  • Page 563

    Detailed description 2.3 Channel Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 The following functions can be controlled from the PLC: • Cancel axis/spindle sequence (equivalent to delete distancetogo) • Stop or interru...

  • Page 564

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Messages If desired, a message can be issued when a Start attempt occurs while a global block disable is active. The control is exercised u...

  • Page 565

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 2.4.1 Program execution without setpoint outputs Functionality In the "Program test" status, a part program is executed without t...

  • Page 566

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Display As feedback that the program test is active, the appropriate field on the operator interface is reversed and interface signal: DB21...

  • Page 567

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Usage The user can execute a part program block-by-block to check the individual machining steps. Once the user decides that an executed pa...

  • Page 568

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation On detection of the "Single Block" key on the machine control panel, the basic PLC program sets interface signal: DB21...

  • Page 569

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 2.4.3 Program execution with dry run feedrate Functionality The part program can be started via interface signal: DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Star...

  • Page 570

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Changing the dry run feedrate The effect of setting data: SD42100 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED can be controlled using setting data: SD42101 $SC_DRY_R...

  • Page 571

    Detailed description 2.4 Program test Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 %100N120 M30N80 ...N30 ...Main program/subroutineN10 ...N20 .../N40 .../N50 ...N60 ...N70 ...N90 ...N100 ...N110 ...Block being processedSk...

  • Page 572

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5 2.5 Block search Functionality Block search offers the possibility of starting part program execution from almost any part program bloc...

  • Page 573

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Subsequent actions After completion of a block search, the following subsequent actions may occur: • Type 1 - Type 5: Automatic Start of ...

  • Page 574

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.1 Sequence for block search of Type 1, 2 and 4 Time sequence The block search (Types 1, 2, and 4) proceeds as follows: 1. Activate sea...

  • Page 575

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Continuation mode after block search After the block search, the program can be started (for the purpose of continuing) via the interface s...

  • Page 576

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.2 Block search in connection with other NCK functions 2.5.2.1 ASUB after and during block search Synchronization of the channel axes Wi...

  • Page 577

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Block search type 4 and part program command REPOS After block search type 4 (block search with calculation at block end point) no automati...

  • Page 578

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.2.3 Spindle functions after block search Control system response and output The behavior with regard to the spindle functions after en...

  • Page 579

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Note The contents of the system variables $P_S, $P_DIR and $P_SGEAR may be lost after block search due to synchronization operations. Refe...

  • Page 580

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example ASUB activation Sequence for the automatic start of an ASUB after block search: 1. Start block search (with/without calculation, at...

  • Page 581

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Execution behavior Search target found, restart search When the search target is reached, the program execution stops and the search targe...

  • Page 582

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.5 Examples of block search with calculation Selection From the following examples, select the type of block search that corresponds to ...

  • Page 583

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 YX1002000300100200300400Approach point(170,30)Toolchange point (450,300)Approach movementTarget block N220 Figure 2-4 Approach movement for...

  • Page 584

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Type 2 block search with calculation at contour Example with automatic tool change after block search with active tool management: 1. to 3...

  • Page 585

    Detailed description 2.5 Block search Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Part programs for Type 4 and Type 2 PROC WORKPIECE_1 ;Main program ... ;Machine contour section 1 with "CUTTER_1"tool ... N100 G...

  • Page 586

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N1070 T = $TC_TP2[TNR_SUCHLAUF] ; T selection by tool name N1080 WZW ; Call tool change routine N1090 IF TNR_VORWAHL == TNR_...

  • Page 587

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Supported functions Supported NC functions during SERUPRO: • Gear stage change • Setpoint and actual value linkages for...

  • Page 588

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3. Numerous operator actions are permitted during this phase: – Start, Stop – Axis replacement – Deletion of distance-...

  • Page 589

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 Boundary conditions for block search SERUPRO The SERUPRO function may only be activated in "AUTOMATIC" mode and ma...

  • Page 590

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Controlling SERUPRO behavior Machine data: MD10708 $MN_SERUPRO_MASK can influence the SERUPRO behavior as follows: Stop ...

  • Page 591

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Initial setting for SERUPRO Machine data: MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK is used to define the initial setting of the control ...

  • Page 592

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 For userdefined ASUB after the SERUPRO operation Note If the machine manufacturer decides to start an ASUB after the SERUP...

  • Page 593

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 Note The automatic ASUB start with MD11450 requires Starts to continue the program. The procedure is in this respect simi...

  • Page 594

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Caution The REPOS operation moves all axes from the current position to the start of the target block in a single block wit...

  • Page 595

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 Path axes cannot be influenced individually. For all other axes that are not geometry axes, repositioning of individual axes...

  • Page 596

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note If neither bit 3 nor bit 4 is set, "non-path axes" are repositioned in the residual block in this phase. ...

  • Page 597

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 Caution The interface signal: DB31, ... DBX10.0 (REPOSDELAY) has no effect on machine axes that form a path. You can dete...

  • Page 598

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note In the active ASUB, the IS: DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOSMODEEDGE) does not affect the final REPOS, unless this signal app...

  • Page 599

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 REPOS operations with VDI signals Control REPOS with VDI interface signals REPOS offsets can be positively influenced with t...

  • Page 600

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A REPOSMODE specified by the PLC is acknowledged by the NCK with the interface signals: DB21, ... DBX319.1-319.3 (Repos Pat...

  • Page 601

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 NCK sets acknowledgement again Phase with REPOSPATHMODE still active (residual block of the program stopped at → Time (2) ...

  • Page 602

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Displaying the range of validity The range of validity of the REPOS offset is indicated with interface signal: DB31, ... DBX...

  • Page 603

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 2.6.1.2 Repositioning on contour with controlled REPOS Approach modes Influence path axes individually During SERUPRO approa...

  • Page 604

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Application and procedure SERUPRO approach with RMN offers the opportunity of using the application as shown in the figure: ...

  • Page 605

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 Read REPOS mode in synchronized actions The valid REPOS mode of the interrupted block can be read via synchronized actions u...

  • Page 606

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Mode of functioning with DryRun An active SERUPRO SPEEDFACTOR has the following effect on DryRun: • DryRun is activated si...

  • Page 607

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 The tool management command has the following effect: • The NC acknowledges the commands automatically. • No magazine da...

  • Page 608

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ASUB for calling the tool change routine after block search type 5 PROC ASUPWZV2 N1000 DEF INT TNR_SPINDEL ; Variable for...

  • Page 609

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 Note Modifications for REPOS of spindles: The transitions of speed control mode and positioning mode must be taken into co...

  • Page 610

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Starting a group of channels If a group of channels is only started with "SelfActing SERUPRO", then all channels a...

  • Page 611

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 IPTRLOCK Freezes the interrupt pointer at the next "machine function block". This block is referred to below as th...

  • Page 612

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Examples of nesting with two program levels Nesting of search-suppressed program sections in 2 program levels. ; Interpret...

  • Page 613

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 With implicit IPTRUNLOCK Nesting of search-suppressed program sections in two program levels with implicit IPTRUNLOCK. The i...

  • Page 614

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 An interruption in the search-suppressed program section of the above program always returns block "N10030 G4 F1" ...

  • Page 615

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 2.6.6 Special features in the part-program target block 2.6.6.1 STOPRE in the part-program target block STOPRE block The STO...

  • Page 616

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Implicit preprocessing stop Situations in which interpreter issues an implicit preprocessing stop: 1. In all blocks in whic...

  • Page 617

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 2.6.8 Special features of functions supported during SERUPRO SERUPRO supports the following NC functions: • Traversing t...

  • Page 618

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.8.2 Force Control (FOC) System variables $AA_FOC, $VA_FOC The meaning of system variable $AA_FOC is redefined for SERUPR...

  • Page 619

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 2.6.8.4 Couplings and master-slave Setpoint and actual value couplings The SERUPRO operation is a program simulation in Prog...

  • Page 620

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Reaching simulated target point for LEAD with JOG At the time of "Search target found", the coupling is already ac...

  • Page 621

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 For further information about the master/slave link, see: References: /FB3/ Function Manual Special Function; Speed/Torque C...

  • Page 622

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Gantry axes Mechanically linked machine axes can be moved without a mechanical offset using the gantry axis function. This o...

  • Page 623

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 Autonomous axis operations Autonomous singleaxis operations are axes controlled by the PLC that can also be simulated on SER...

  • Page 624

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.8.6 Gear stage change Operational sequences The gear stage change (GSW) requires physical movements from the NCK in orde...

  • Page 625

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 2.6.8.8 REPOS offset in the interface REPOS offset provided or valid When the SERUPRO operation is finished, the user can us...

  • Page 626

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example: The synchronous spindle coupling at the beginning of the SERUPRO operation is retained for the part program start. ...

  • Page 627

    Detailed description 2.6 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 Synchronized action SERUPRO can be scanned in a synchronized action using system variable $AC_SERUPRO = TRUE. SERUPRO Update...

  • Page 628

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7 2.7 Program operation mode PLC, MD, operation The execution of part programs can be controlled via the HMI in many ways using...

  • Page 629

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 G groups An initial programming setting can be specified for each of the available G groups using MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES ...

  • Page 630

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NC language scope The way that non-active options and functions should be moved with NC language commands can be set via the mach...

  • Page 631

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 The following program is started N1 R1=STRINGIS("TRACYL") ;R1 is 0 (TRACYL is an unknown name) N2 IF STRINGIS("T...

  • Page 632

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.2 Selection and start of part program or part-program block Reset status Channel status A part program can be selected only i...

  • Page 633

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 Execution of command The parts program or the parts program block is automatically executed and the IS: DB21, ... DBX35.5 ("...

  • Page 634

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Execution of command After execution of the STOP command, the IS DB21, ... DBX35.3 ("program status interrupted") is se...

  • Page 635

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 2.7.4 RESET command Command priority Channel status The RESET command can be executed in every channel state. This command is abo...

  • Page 636

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.5 Program status Interface information The status of the selected program is displayed in the interface for each channel. Th...

  • Page 637

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 Table 2-3 Effect on program status Commands Program execution statuses Aborted Interrupted Stopped Wait Running IS "Reset&...

  • Page 638

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The effect of commands/signals The channel status can be modified through the activation of various commands or interface signals...

  • Page 639

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 Table 2-4 Responses to operator or program actions Situation Channel status Program status Active mode Operator or program action...

  • Page 640

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.8 Part-Program Start Start handling Table 2-5 Typical program sequence Sequence Command Conditions (must be satisfied befor...

  • Page 641

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 2.7.9 Example of timing diagram for a program run Signal sequences Figure 2-8 Examples of signals during a program run

  • Page 642

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.10 Program section repetitions Use Basic information Program sections, which have already been programmed, are frequently ne...

  • Page 643

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 Example Milling: Machine drilling position with different technology sequences N10 ZENTRIERBOHRER() ; Zentrierbohrer einwechseln ...

  • Page 644

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Label search direction The program section marked with the Start and End labels can come before or after the REPEATinstruc...

  • Page 645

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 Other program name A name is specified in MD11620 $MN_PROG_EVENT_NAME. The system then searches for the user program in the dire...

  • Page 646

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Event Part program end Table 2-7 Sequence at part program end Sequence Command Boundary conditions (must be satisfied before th...

  • Page 647

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 Event Operator panel reset Table 2-8 Sequence with operator panel reset Sequence Command Boundary conditions (must be satisfied...

  • Page 648

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Event Startup Table 2-9 Table 1–9 Sequence during power-up Sequence Command Boundary conditions (must be satisfied before the...

  • Page 649

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 Chronological sequences For part program start and part-program end: Time sequence of the VDI signals DB21, ... DBB35 ("pr...

  • Page 650

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 For operator panel reset (SW 6.3 and higher): Time sequence of the VDI signals DB21, ... DBB35 ("program status" and ...

  • Page 651

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 Special points to be noted The following must be noted for user program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF: • It is run with the lowest priorit...

  • Page 652

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD 20107: PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF changes block in spite of read-in disable if Bit 0 = 1 is set after part-pro...

  • Page 653

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 Event programs Example for call by all events For MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT = 'H0F', i.e. call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF for part progra...

  • Page 654

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example for call of operator panel reset For MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT = 'H04' PROC PROG_EVENT DISPLOF N10 DRFOF ; Deactivate DR...

  • Page 655

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 2.7.13 Control and effect on stop events Controlling stop events Stop events can be controlled for a particular program area in ...

  • Page 656

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Some NCK events are stopped for a short time, in order to perform a switching operation, and restarted immediately. Thes...

  • Page 657

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 NCK events Response Stop criteria STOPPROGATSUPEND System fault SR end should always deselect the stop delay section. WAITM Alar...

  • Page 658

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.14 Asynchronous Subroutines (ASUBs), Interrupt Routines Overview Interrupt inputs allow the NC to interrupt the current NC p...

  • Page 659

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 Interrupt routines/ASUBs Term Identical functionality is identified by the terms ASUB and Interrupt routines. In the following t...

  • Page 660

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization by SETINT An interrupt signal must be assigned to the part programs via NC instruction SETINT. This turns the p...

  • Page 661

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-115 Processing of interrupt routine The "Interrupt" program is automatically started on completion of reorganization. It i...

  • Page 662

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-116 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Clear assignment The assignment interrupt signal <-> part program is cleared when the following happens: • Channel in Re...

  • Page 663

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-117 Priorities Machine data MD11604 $MN_ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL can be used to specify the minimum priority level that the settings in...

  • Page 664

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-118 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Status of NC Start of ASUB Control system reaction MDA JOG, MDA Teach-In, MDA Teach reference pnt. Interrupt, (PLC) Manual mode...

  • Page 665

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-119 Acknowledgment signal DB21, ... DBX318.0 Control systems can also be stopped/started from AUTOMATIC mode automatically prior to ...

  • Page 666

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-120 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Cross-mode Start of ASUBs Requirements: • Option: Cross-mode actions (Order no.: 6FC5 251-0AD04-0AA0) • MD11602 $MN_ASUP_STA...

  • Page 667

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-121 120UserRETUserREPOSValue stored in MD 11610_N_ASUP_SPFSystemASUBRETSystemASUBREPOSSystemASUBREPOSSystemASUBRETNCK system SWUser ...

  • Page 668

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-122 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Meaning of bits The meaning of the bits of system variable $AC_ASUP is as follows: Bit Meaning 0 User interrupt "ASUB wit...

  • Page 669

    Detailed description 2.7 Program operation mode Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-123 User ASUB User routine protection level If a userdefined routine is to be used, i.e., if a value other than 0 is in MD 11610: AS...

  • Page 670

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-124 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.8 2.8 Single block Block-by-block processing With the single-block function, the user can execute a part program block-by-block. Single...

  • Page 671

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-125 1. Stopping after every block is undesirable in many situations and/or with certain blocks. – 1. Example: Change to jog, if it cannot b...

  • Page 672

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-126 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.8.1 Decoding single block SBL2 with implicit preprocessing stop Asynchronicity As a result of preprocessing of part program blocks, the ...

  • Page 673

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-127 2.8.2 Single-block stop: Suppression using SBLOF Single block off Programs identified by the language command SBLOF are executed completel...

  • Page 674

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-128 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example: ASUP.SPF: N10 SBLOF N20 IF $AC_ASUP==’H200’ N30 RET ; No REPOS on mode change N40 ELSE N50 REPOSA ; REPOS in all other...

  • Page 675

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-129 Example 2: An ASUB, which is started by the PLC in order to activate a modified zero offset and tool offsets, is to be executed invisibly....

  • Page 676

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-130 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Sequence If an ASUB is activated during the single block, for example, execution of the ASUB is completed. The deceleration movement does ...

  • Page 677

    Detailed description 2.8 Single block Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-131 2.8.4 Single-block behavior in mode group with type A/B Classifying channels One mode group channel must be classified as a single-block c...

  • Page 678

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-132 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9 2.9 Program control Options 1. Function selection (via operator interface or PLC) 2. Activation of skip levels 3. Adapting the size...

  • Page 679

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-133 Table 2-11 Program control: Interface signals Function Selection signal Activation signal Feedback signal SKP skip block 0 to 7 SKP ski...

  • Page 680

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-134 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number of levels MD9423 $MM_MAX_SKP_LEVEL is used to define the number of skip levels. Example signals: Blocks, which are not to be ex...

  • Page 681

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-135 2.9.3 Adapting the size of the interpolation buffer MD28060 The channelspecific interpolator executes prepared blocks from the interpol...

  • Page 682

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-136 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Validity SD42990 $SC_MAX_BLOCK_IN_IPOBUFFER has global, channel-specific validity and can also be modified in a part program. This modi...

  • Page 683

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-137 Processed values Values processed in the basic block display coincide with the: • selected tools • feed and spindle speed • actua...

  • Page 684

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-138 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activating The basic block display is activated by MD 28400 $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK by means of Power On. If MD28400 $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK is set to ...

  • Page 685

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-139 Radius / diameter values Diameter values shown in the basic block display and position display may be needed as a radius for internal c...

  • Page 686

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-140 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example: G0 X10 Y10 Z10 ; Block to be preprocessed for the basic block display COMPCAD ; Compressor for optimized surface quality (CAD...

  • Page 687

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-141 The display block for the basic block display is directly derived from the programmed part program blocks according to the following ru...

  • Page 688

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-142 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Examples Comparisons between display block (original block) and basic block display: • Programmed positions are displayed in absolute...

  • Page 689

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-143 • For Tool selection by tool command display information is generated in the form T<value> or T=<string>. If an address ...

  • Page 690

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-144 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • With the EXECTAB command (processing a table of contour elements), the block generated by EXECTAB is shown in the display block. ...

  • Page 691

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-145 • External subroutine: Executing a subroutine in "Execution from external source" mode The "external" subroutine...

  • Page 692

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-146 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Setting Data SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH can be used to set the call path flexibly. SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH c...

  • Page 693

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-147 Example The program to be reloaded is stored on the local hard disk of HMI Advanced: • SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH = "_N_WKS_DIR/_...

  • Page 694

    Detailed description 2.9 Program control Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-148 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note An absolute path must always be specified in HMI Embedded powerline. For further explanations about operation under HMI Embedded...

  • Page 695

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-149 2.10 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-pr...

  • Page 696

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-150 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Run-up(POWER ON)MD 20110:RESET_MODE_MASKBit 0Bit 0=1Bit 0=0(default)- G co...

  • Page 697

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-151 Figure 2-17 System settings after RESET/part program end and part program...

  • Page 698

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-152 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-13 Selection of RESET and powerup response MD number RESET_MODE_MA...

  • Page 699

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-153 Table 2-14 Effect of MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bits 0 to 6 Bit 0 = 1 Bit...

  • Page 700

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-154 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-16 Effect of MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bits 13 to 17 (in SW 6.4 ...

  • Page 701

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-155 Note The previous setting option in machine data MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_M...

  • Page 702

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-156 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Table 2-18 Effect of MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK Bits 8 to 12 Bit 8 = 1 B...

  • Page 703

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-157 Meaning of the machine data The channelspecific machine data in the table ...

  • Page 704

    Detailed description 2.10 System settings for power-up, RESET/part-program end and part-program start Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-158 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example: 1. Activate RESET setting on RESET: MD20110 = 'H01' (Bit 0) MD2...

  • Page 705

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-159 2.11 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions 2.11.1 Replacement of auxiliary functions with subrout...

  • Page 706

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-160 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 M functions that cannot be configured M functions with a fixed meaning must not be used to call subroutines...

  • Page 707

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-161 Boundary conditions For subroutine calls with M, T, and D functions, the following boundary conditions appl...

  • Page 708

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-162 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Address extension of M function Using system variable $C_ME it is possible to read the address extension of...

  • Page 709

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-163 Assigning subroutines The machine data • MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is used to assign a subroutine t...

  • Page 710

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-164 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 System variable $P_SUB_STAT can be used to determine the timing (block start/block end) of a replacement op...

  • Page 711

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-165 2.11.3.2 M function replacement for tool change Calling a tool change program with M function The following...

  • Page 712

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-166 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Program example of tool change with M function replacement PROC MAIN ... N10 T1 D1 M6 ... N90 M30 ...

  • Page 713

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-167 N4300 IF $C_D_PROG == TRUE ; Scan whether address D has been programmed N4300 ; Replacement for address D N...

  • Page 714

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-168 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.4 Parameter transfer to the replacement subroutine Rules for parameter transfer The following basic pr...

  • Page 715

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-169 System variable Remarks MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR]. 2. In the case of a tool change...

  • Page 716

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-170 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example of tool change with M6 active and MD10719: T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE= 0 MD10719 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE =...

  • Page 717

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-171 Conflict resolution in case of multiple replacements with the same name The following table provides inform...

  • Page 718

    Detailed description 2.11 Subroutine call with M, T, and D functions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-172 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.5 Properties of replacement subroutines General rules for replacement subroutines • Like any other s...

  • Page 719

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-173 Boundary condition for replacement subroutines The following boundary conditions apply to replacement subroutines: ...

  • Page 720

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-174 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NC-specific system variables The following NC-specific system variables are available: Names Meaning Description $...

  • Page 721

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-175 Names Meaning Description $AC_OPERATING_TIME Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode (in s) Totals the accum...

  • Page 722

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-176 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.3 Workpiece counter Functionality The "Workpiece counter" function makes available various channel-sp...

  • Page 723

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-177 Activation The workpiece counters are activated or the reset timing and counting algorithm are specified via the fol...

  • Page 724

    Detailed description 2.12 Program runtime/workpiece counter Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 2-178 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Examples Activation of workpiece counter $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS MD27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER = 'H3' Alarm displayed with: $A...

  • Page 725

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3 There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 726

    Supplementary conditions Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 727

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4 The examples appear with the descriptions in the individual sections of the function descriptions.

  • Page 728

    Examples Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 729

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 5.1 Machine data 5.1.1 General machine data 5.1.1.1 HMIspecific machine data Number ADV EMB Identifier: $MM_ Description 9421 9421 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST Display ...

  • Page 730

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 11470 REPOS_MODE_MASK Repositioning properties 11600 BAG_MASK Mode group response to ASUB 11602 ASUP_START_MASK Ig...

  • Page 731

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20210 CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT Max. angle for intersection calculation with tool radius compensation 20220 CUTCOM_MAX_D...

  • Page 732

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.1.2.3 Reset response Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Initial setting at RESET 20112 START_MODE_MASK Initial setting at sp...

  • Page 733

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 5.1.2.5 Transformation definitions Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 Definition of transformation 1 in channel 24110 TRAFO_AXES_...

  • Page 734

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 24560 TRAFO5_JOINT_OFFSET_1 Vector of kinematic offset for 5-axis transformation 1 24600 TRAFO5_PART_OFFSET_2 Offs...

  • Page 735

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-7 5.1.3 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 30550 AXCONF_ASSIGN_MASTER_CHAN Reset position of channel for axis change...

  • Page 736

    Data lists Signals Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3 Signals 5.3.1 Signals to NC DB number Byte.Bit Description 10 56.1 EMERGENCY STOP 5.3.2 Signals to mode group DB number Byte.Bit Description 11, ... 0.0 AU...

  • Page 737

    Data lists Signals Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-9 DB number Byte.Bit Description 11, ... 6.7 All channels in Reset state 11, ... 7.0 Active machine function TEACH-IN 11, ... 7.1 Active machine function REPOS 1...

  • Page 738

    Data lists Signals Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 27.1 Skip-block selected 21, ... 31.0- 31.2 REPOSPATHMODE: 0 - 2 21, ... 31.4 REPOS MODE EDGE 21, ... 31.6 Skip-block...

  • Page 739

    Data lists Signals Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-11 5.3.7 Signals from axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 70.0 REPOS offset 31, ... 70.1 REPOS offset valid 31, ... 70.2 REPOS Delay Ack 31, ... ...

  • Page 740

    Data lists Signals Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) 5-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 741

    Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS, 721,2-170 $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS, 721,2-170 $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS, 721,2-170 $AC_TOTAL_PARTS, 721,2-170 $P_SEARCH_S, 578,2-31 $P_SEARCH_SDIR, 578,2-31 ...

  • Page 742

    Index Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 C Calling the ASUB outside program operation, 662,2-115 662, Cascaded block search, 580,2-33 Channel Change in configuration, 561,2-14 Configuration, 561,2-14 -disp...

  • Page 743

    Index Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 DBX7.4, 632,2-83, 633,2-84 DBX7.5, 563,2-16 DBX7.7, 632,2-83, 635,2-86 DB21-DB30, ... DBB35, 650,2-103 DB31, ... DBB28.7, 562,2-15 DBX10.0, 593,2-46, 596,2-48, ...

  • Page 744

    Index Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Index-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD17200, 683,2-135 MD18800, 706,2-156 MD20000, 561,2-14 MD20094, 706,2-156 MD20095, 706,2-156 MD20106, 651,2-104 MD20107, 651,2-104 MD20108, 644,2-98, 645,2-99...

  • Page 745

    Index Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-5 Interface signals, 679,2-131 Program display modes, 682,2-134 Program execution without setpoint outputs, 565,2-18 Program operation, 627,2-79 Initial se 628,tting, ...

  • Page 746

    Index Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, Reset Response (K1) Index-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Protection level, 669,2-122 Single-block processing, 669,2-122 User-defined System ASUBs, 666,2-119 Userdefined ASUB after SERUPRO operation, 592,2-44 W 657,WAITE,...

  • Page 747

    753,Brief description 753, 753, 753,1 763,Detailed description 763, 763,2 877,Supplementary conditions 877, 877, 877,3 879,Examples 879, 879, 879,4 887,Data lists 887, 887,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual 03/200...

  • Page 748

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 749

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 753,1-1 1.1 Axes ........

  • Page 750

    Table of contents Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 809,2-47 2.4.4.2 Activating ...

  • Page 751

    Table of contents Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 5.2 Setting data................................................................................................................................ 890,5-4 5.2.1 Channelspecific set...

  • Page 752

    Table of contents Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 753

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 11.1 Axes Machine axes Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool. Channel axes Every geometry axis and every special axis is assigned to a channel and, the...

  • Page 754

    Brief description 1.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Synchronized axes Synchronous axes are interpolated together with path axes (all path axes and synchronous axes of one channel have a common path interpolator). All pa...

  • Page 755

    Brief description 1.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-3 Axis container An axis container is a circular buffer data structure, in which local axes and/or link axes are assigned to channels. The entries in the circular buffer...

  • Page 756

    Brief description 1.2 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 1-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1.2 Coordinate systems MCS The machine coordinate system (MCS) has the following properties: • It is defined by the machine axes. • The machine axes...

  • Page 757

    Brief description 1.2 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-5 WCS The workpiece coordinate system (WCS) has the following properties: • In the workpiece coordinate system all the axes coordinates are programmed (...

  • Page 758

    Brief description 1.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 1-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1.3 Frames FRAME A FRAME is a closed calculation rule that translates one Cartesian coordinate system into another. FRAME components Figure 1-1 FRAME components A...

  • Page 759

    Brief description 1.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-7 Scaling Programmable with: • SCALE and • ASCALE Mirroring Programmable with: • MIRROR and • AMIRROR Features in relation to axes The rough and fine offsets...

  • Page 760

    Brief description 1.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 1-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Scaling SCALE is used to program the programmable scale factors for all geometry axes and special axes. ASCALE must be programmed if a new scaling is to be based on ...

  • Page 761

    Brief description 1.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-9 NCU global basic frames For rotary indexing machine technology, for example, a channel must be used to define frames for other channels. These cross-channel frames a...

  • Page 762

    Brief description 1.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 1-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 763

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Axes 2.1.1 Overview Figure 2-1 Relationship between geometry axes, special axes and machine axes

  • Page 764

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-2 Local and external machine axes (link axes)

  • Page 765

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 2.1.2 Machine axes Meaning Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool. Figure 2-3 Machine axes X, Y, Z, B, S on a Cartesian machine

  • Page 766

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Application The following can be machine axes: • Geometry axes X, Y, Z • Orientation axes A, B, C • Loader axes • Tool turrets • Axes for tool magazine ...

  • Page 767

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.5 Replaceable geometry axes Meaning The "Replaceable geometry axes" function allows the geometry axes in a grouping to be replaced by other channel ax...

  • Page 768

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The following functions may not be active when geometry axes are replaced: – Transformation – Spline interpolation – Tool radius compensation – Tool fin...

  • Page 769

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 TRUE: The configuration of the geometry axes remains unchanged or is switched to the basic state defined in machine data AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB on Reset and part-p...

  • Page 770

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A maximum of two transformations per channel can be available simultaneously from the transformation groups below: • Orientation transformations (3-axis, 4-axis, ...

  • Page 771

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 2.1.6 Special axes Meaning In contrast to geometry axes, no geometrical relationship is defined between the special axes. Note Note: Geometry axes have an exactly...

  • Page 772

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Application Path axes are used to machine the workpiece with the programmed contour. 2.1.8 Positioning axes Meaning Positioning axes are interpolated separately (e...

  • Page 773

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.1.9 Main axes Meaning A main axis is an axis that is interpolated by the main run. This interpolation can be started: • From synchronized actions (as command a...

  • Page 774

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.10 Synchronized axes Meaning Synchronous axes are components of the path axes, which are not referenced in order to calculate the tool path velocity. They are ...

  • Page 775

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 2.1.11 Axis configuration The figure below shows the assignment between the geometry axes, special axes, channel axes and machine axes as well as the names of the ...

  • Page 776

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Leading zeroes in user-defined axis identifiers are ignored. Example: MD10000 `$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] = X01 corresponds to X1 The geometry axes must b...

  • Page 777

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Reliability of channel axis gaps The machine data MD11640 $MN_ENABLE_CHAN_AX_GAP must be used to explicitly inform of channel axis gaps. If this is not carried ou...

  • Page 778

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The gaps count as axes with reference to the number of channel axes and their indices. If an attempt is made to define a channel axis gap on the geo axis vi...

  • Page 779

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Figure 2-6 Overview of link axes The link axes are described in References: /FB2/ Function Manual, Extension Functions; Multiple Operator Panels on Multiple NCUs...

  • Page 780

    Detailed description 2.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-7 Mapping of channel axes onto axis containers via logical machine axis image

  • Page 781

    Detailed description 2.2 Zeros and reference points Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Axis container entries contain local machine axes or link axes from the perspective of an individual NCU. The entries in the logical machine ...

  • Page 782

    Detailed description 2.2 Zeros and reference points Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Reference point R The position of the reference point R is defined by cam switches. Reference point R calibrates the position measuring s...

  • Page 783

    Detailed description 2.2 Zeros and reference points Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Figure 2-9 Position of coordinate systems by machine zero M and workpiece zero W Figure 2-10 Position of reference point in relation to mac...

  • Page 784

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3 Coordinate systems 2.3.1 Overview Meaning DIN 66217 stipulates that machine tools must use right-handed, rectangular (Cartesian) coordinate syste...

  • Page 785

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Figure 2-12 Interrelationship between coordinate systems

  • Page 786

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3.2 Machine coordinate system (MCS) The machine coordinate system (MCS) is made up of all physically available machine axes. Figure 2-13 MCS with...

  • Page 787

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Figure 2-14 MCS with machine axes X, Z (turning machine) Axial preset offset The "Preset" function can be used to redefine the control zer...

  • Page 788

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-15 MCS=BCS without kinematic transformation Machine tools with kinematic transformation The BCS and the MCS do not coincide when the BCS is...

  • Page 789

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Machine kinematics The workpiece is always programmed in a two or threedimensional, rightangled coordinate system (WCS). However, such workpieces are...

  • Page 790

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Setting the offset values The offset values are set: • PLC By describing system variables • Via the operator panel From menu "Current zero o...

  • Page 791

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Note The read value can then differ from the previously set value, if the set value has not yet been activated. The read value corresponds to a valu...

  • Page 792

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Suppression The NC program instruction SUPA suppresses the "Zero offset external" while the block is being processed. The command G74 (refe...

  • Page 793

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Basic offset The basic offset describes the coordinate transformation between BCS and BZS. It can be used, for example, to define the palette window ...

  • Page 794

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Machine manufacturer Recommendation: Use the 3rd basic offset onwards for your own applications. The 1st and 2nd basic offsets are reserved f...

  • Page 795

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Coordinate system: 0: Actual-value display in relation to the WCS 1: Actual-value display in relation to the SZS Note Display of the current coord...

  • Page 796

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-21 SZS with MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET = 0 Figure 2-22 SZS with MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET = 1 Manual traverse in SZS The geometry axes are ...

  • Page 797

    Detailed description 2.3 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Figure 2-23 Manual traverse in WCS or SZS 2.3.8 Workpiece coordinate system (WCS) WCS The workpiece coordinate system (WCS) is the programming basis...

  • Page 798

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4 Frames 2.4.1 Coordinate axes, zeros and reference points As a rule, a coordinate system is formed of three mutually perpendicular coordinate axes. The posi...

  • Page 799

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 The position of the reference point R is defined by cam switches. The reference point must be approached each time the control is activated. The control can on...

  • Page 800

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.3 Frame components 2.4.3.1 Translation The program commands below are used to program the translation: $P_UIFR[1] = CTRANS(x,10,y,10) $P_UIFR[1,x,tr] =...

  • Page 801

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 A fine offset can only be programmed if machine data MD18600 $MN_FRAME_FINE_TRANS is predefined with a value of 1. If this is not the case, every assignment o...

  • Page 802

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 If the rotary motion is in a clockwise direction when looking in the positive direction of the coordinate axis, the direction of rotation is positive. A, B an...

  • Page 803

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 RPY Rotations with a RPY angle are carried out in the order Z, Y', X''. The angles are only defined ambiguously in the following ranges: -180 <= x <= 18...

  • Page 804

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Euler angle Rotations with a Euler angle are carried out in the order Z, X', Z''. The angles are only defined ambiguously in the following ranges: 0 <= ...

  • Page 805

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 CRPL - Constant Rotation Plane The predefined function Constant Rotation Plane: FRAME CRPL( INT, REAL) allows a rotation to be programmed in any plane for each ...

  • Page 806

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.3.4 Scaling The program commands below are used to program the scaling: $P_UIFR[1] = CSCALE(x, 1, y, 1) SCALE x = 1 y = 1 $P_UIFR[1,x, sc] = 1 2.4.3.5 ...

  • Page 807

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 The program commands below are used to program a mirroring: $P_UIFR[1] = CMIRROR(x, 1, y, 1) MIRROR x = 1 y = 1 $P_UIFR[1,x, mi] = 1 2.4.3.6 Chain operator Fr...

  • Page 808

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programming examples: $P_PFRAME[SPI(1),TR]=22.22 $P_PFRAME=CTRANS (X, axis value, Y, axis value, SPI(1), axis value) $P_PFRAME=CSCALE (X, scale, Y, scale, SPI(2...

  • Page 809

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 2.4.4 Frames in data management and active frames 2.4.4.1 Overview There are various types of frame: system frames, basic frames, settable frames and the program...

  • Page 810

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 811

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 2.4.4.2 Activating data management frames Data management frames become active frames by executing G500, G54 to G599, or RESET with the appropriate machine data ...

  • Page 812

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.4.3 NCU global frames All settable frames G54 to G599 and all basic frames can be configured NCU globally or channel-specifically. A combination of these is ...

  • Page 813

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 The current complete frame is calculated according to the formula below: $P_PARTFRAME : $P_SETFRAME : $P_EXTFRAME : $P_ACTBFRAME : $P_IFRAME : $P_TOOLFRAME ...

  • Page 814

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The machine data MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET can be used to set whether the SZS is with or without the prog. frame and the transformation frame. The value 0...

  • Page 815

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 2.4.5.3 Manual traverse in the SZS coordinate system Previously, geometry axes have been traversed manually in JOG mode in the WCS. In addition, there is also th...

  • Page 816

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SUPA Implicit preprocessing stop and non-modal suppression of frames analog G153 and additional handwheel offsets (DRF), [ext. zero offset], superimposed motion ...

  • Page 817

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 2.4.6 Frame chain frames 2.4.6.1 Overview There are up to four frame variants: • Settable frames (G500,G54 to G599) • Basic frames • Programmable frame ...

  • Page 818

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.6.3 Channel basic frames $P_CHBFR[n] The number of basic frames can be configured in the channel via machine data MD28081 $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES . The mini...

  • Page 819

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 Current first basic frame in the channel $P_BFRAME The system variable is retained for reasons of compatibility, although it is redundant for the $P_CHBFRAME[0] ...

  • Page 820

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programming global frames Global frames are programmed analogously, as are channel-specific frames, i.e., global basic frames are programmed with $P_NCBFR[n] an...

  • Page 821

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 2.4.6.5 Complete basic frame $P_ACTBFRAME The chained complete basic frame is determined by the variable. The variable is readonly. $P_ACTBFRAME corresponds to...

  • Page 822

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.6.6 Programmable frame $P_PFRAME The programmable frame is only available as an active frame. This frame is reserved for the programmer. The programmable f...

  • Page 823

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 A value = 0 means that the axis is not mirrored and a value = 1 means that the axis will always be mirrored, irrespective of whether it has already been mirrored...

  • Page 824

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The table below shows the effect of various program commands on the absolute and additive translation. Coarse or absolute translation Fine or additive translat...

  • Page 825

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 System frames in data management The system frames are stored in the SRAM and can, therefore, be archived and reloaded. System frames in data management can be r...

  • Page 826

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • $P_PARTFRAME In the part program, the variable $P_PARTFRAME can be used to read and write the current system frame for TCARR and PAROT for toolholders with o...

  • Page 827

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 2.4.7 Implicit frame changes 2.4.7.1 Frames and switchover of geometry axes In the channel, the geometry axis configuration can be changed by switching a transfo...

  • Page 828

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The workpiece geometry is described by a coordinate system that is formed by the geometry axes. A channel axis is assigned to each geometry axis and a machine ax...

  • Page 829

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[1] = 2 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[2] = 3 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[0] = "X" $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[1]="Y" $M...

  • Page 830

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.7.2 Frame for selection and deselection of transformations This function is available with NCK 51.00.00 and higher. Transformations TRANSMIT, TRACYL and TRAA...

  • Page 831

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 MD24905 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 = 2 MD24905 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 = 2 With this setting, the axial offset of the rotary axis is taken account of in the...

  • Page 832

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] = 1 ; G500 is the default setting. $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0 $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES = 3 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES = ...

  • Page 833

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 ; TRANSMIT is 2nd transformer $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2 = 256 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[0] = 1 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1] = 6 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[2] = 2 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[3] ...

  • Page 834

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ;Approach start position N920 G0 X20 Z10 N930 N940 if $P_BFRAME <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,20,Z,30,C,15) N950 setal(61000) N960 endif N970 if $P_BFRAME <> $...

  • Page 835

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 ;Four-edge roughing N1390 G1 X10 Y-10 G41 OFFN=1; allowance 1 mm N1400 X-10 N1410 Y10 N1420 X10 N1430 Y-10 N1440 ;Change tool N1460 G0 Z20 G40 OFFN=0 N1470 T...

  • Page 836

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N1820 if $P_BFRAME <> $P_CHBFR[0] N1830 setal(61000) N1840 endif N1850 if $P_IFRAME <> TRANS(X,11,Y,2,Z,3,C,4):CROT(X,10,Y,20,Z,30):CMIRROR(X,C) N18...

  • Page 837

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 TRACYL Tracyl expansions: The machine data below can be used to take the axial complete frame of the tracyl rotary axis, i.e., the translation, fine offset, m...

  • Page 838

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Frame expansions: The expansions described below are only valid for the machine data MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE = 1 MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE...

  • Page 839

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES = 10 ; from 5 to 100 $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES = 3 ; from 0 to 8 $MN_NCBFRAME_RESET_MASK = 'HFF' $MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK = 'HFF' $MN_MIR...

  • Page 840

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ; Frame settings N500 $P_UIFR[1] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,b,4) N510 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : crot(x,10,y,20,z,30) N520 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : cmirror(x,b) N530 ...

  • Page 841

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 N920 if $P_ACTFRAME <> TRANS(X,11,Y,0,Z,33,CAY,22,B,19):CROT(X,10,Y,20,Z,30):CMIRROR(X,B) N930 setal(61001) N940 endif N950 N960 $P_UIFR[1,x,tr] = 11 N97...

  • Page 842

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N1360 G00 x0 y0 z0 G90 N1370 N1380 m30 TRAANG Frame expansions: The expansions described below are only valid for the machine data MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CH...

  • Page 843

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 ; FRAME configurations $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK = 'H1' ; SETFRAME $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK = 'H41' ; Frames are active after RESET. $MC_CHSFRAME_POWERON_MASK = ...

  • Page 844

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]=4 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[1]=2 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[2]=3 $MC_TRAANG_ANGLE_1 = 85. $MC_TRAANG_PARALLEL_VELO_RES_1 =...

  • Page 845

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 Part program: ; Frame settings N820 $P_UIFR[1] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,b,4,c,5) N830 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : crot(x,10,y,20,z,30) N840 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : ...

  • Page 846

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N1220 setal(61000) N1230 endif N1240 if $P_ACTFRAME <> TRANS(X,11,Y,22,Z,33,CAX,11,B,44,C,20):CROT(X,10,Y,20,Z,30):CMIRROR(X,CAX,C) N1250 setal(61001) N126...

  • Page 847

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 ; Deselect frame N1580 Z20 G40 N1590 TRANS N1600 N1610 if $P_BFRAME <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,20,Z,30,CAX,10,B,40,C,15) N1620 setal(61000) N1630 endif N1640 if $P_...

  • Page 848

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.7.3 Adapting active frames The geometry axis configuration can change during program execution or on RESET. The number of available geometry axes can vary fr...

  • Page 849

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 2.4.8 Predefined frame functions 2.4.8.1 Inverse frame To round off the frame arithmetic, the part program provides a function which calculates the inverse frame...

  • Page 850

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Application example: A frame calculated, for example, via a measuring function, must be entered in the current SETFRAME such that the new complete frame is a cha...

  • Page 851

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 ; Store measuring point 2 $AC_MEAS_LATCH[1] = 1 ; Approach measuring point 3 g1 x-4 y4 ; Store measuring point 3 $AC_MEAS_LATCH[2] = 1 ; Approach measuring po...

  • Page 852

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 if $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE <> 30 setal(61000 + $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE) endif if $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE <> 90 setal(61000 + $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE) endif ; Trans...

  • Page 853

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 2.4.8.2 Additive frame in frame chain Measurements on the workpiece or calculations in the part program and cycles generally produce a frame that is applied addi...

  • Page 854

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.9 Functions 2.4.9.1 Setting zeros, workpiece measuring and tool measuring PRESET is achieved using HMI operator actions or measuring cycles. The calculated f...

  • Page 855

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 If a level change of the axis signal from 0 to 1 is detected, the movement is stopped immediately, the preprocessing is reorganized and the current system frame ...

  • Page 856

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The ratios are shown in the figure below: Figure 2-25 Frame on activation of a rotary table with TCARR With kinematics of type M (tool and table are each rotary...

  • Page 857

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 With SW P6.2 and higher, the entire programmable frame remains unchanged, including its rotation component. The rotation component, which describes the rotation...

  • Page 858

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Instead of MOVT= ... it is also possible to write MOVT=IC( ...) if it is to be plainly visible that MOVT is to function incrementally. There is no functional dif...

  • Page 859

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 Definition of frame rotations with solid angles Where a frame is to be defined to describe a rotation around more than one axis, this is achieved through chaini...

  • Page 860

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The two programmed axes define a plane, the non-programmed axis defines the related third axis of a right-hand coordinate system. Which axis is first and which s...

  • Page 861

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 The language command TOROT is then also used. This command overwrites only the rotation component in the programmed frame and leaves the remaining components unc...

  • Page 862

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Setting data SD42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE is, therefore, introduced, which can be used to control the response of TOFRAME and TOROT. It can accept values of 0 (i...

  • Page 863

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 Example: ... ... N90 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE=1 N100 ROT Z45 N110 TCARR=1 TCOABS T1 D1 N120 TOROT ... ... N100 describes a rotation by 45 degrees in the XY plane. It i...

  • Page 864

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 TCARR and PAROT Previously, TCARR has used the basic frame identified by machine data MD20184 $MC_TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER . A system frame can be created f...

  • Page 865

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 TOROT and TOFRAME The system frame for TOROT and TOFRAME is configured with bit 3 in machine data MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK . This system frame is loc...

  • Page 866

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N290 X0 Y0 Z0 N300 G18 MOVT=AC(20) ; Processing in G18 plane N310 G17 X10 Y0 Z0 ; Processing in G17 plane N320 MOVT=-10 N330 PAROTOF ; Deactivate rotation of ...

  • Page 867

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 2.4.11 Data backup Data block _N_CHANx_UFR is used to archive the system frames. Machine data MD28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK should not have changed between...

  • Page 868

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 $AA_IEN[axis] The setpoints in the settable zero system (SZS) can be read for each axis using the variables $AA_IEN[axis]. $AA_IBN[axis] The setpoints in the b...

  • Page 869

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 2.4.13.3 Reset, program end The Reset response of the basic frame is set via MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK . The system frames are retained in the data manageme...

  • Page 870

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 0 = 1 and bit 14 = 0 Chained complete basic frame is deleted. Bit 0 = 1 and bit 14 = 1 The complete basic frame results from $M...

  • Page 871

    Detailed description 2.4 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 2.4.13.4 Response at part-program start Programmable frame Deleted Settable frames Retained, depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK Complete basic frame R...

  • Page 872

    Detailed description 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system 2.5.1 Overview Definition The term "workpiece-related actual-value system" design...

  • Page 873

    Detailed description 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 Interrelationships between coordinate systems The figure below shows the interrelationships between the machine coordinate system (...

  • Page 874

    Detailed description 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.3 Special reactions Overstore Overstoring in RESET state of: • Frames (zero offsets) • Active plane • Activated transform...

  • Page 875

    Detailed description 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 Actual-value display The programmed contour is always displayed in the WCS. The following offsets are added to the MCS: • Kinemat...

  • Page 876

    Detailed description 2.5 Workpiecerelated actualvalue system Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 877

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 878

    Supplementary conditions Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 879

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 Axes Axis configuration for a 3axis milling machine with rotary table 1. Machine axis: X1 Linear axis 2. Machine axis: Y1 Linear axis 3. Machine axis: Z1 Linear axis 4. Machine axi...

  • Page 880

    Examples 4.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization of the machine data Machine data Value MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] = X1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[1] = Y1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[2] = ...

  • Page 881

    Examples 4.1 Axes Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 Machine data Value MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[1] = 2 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[2] = 3 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[3] = 4 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4] = 5 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX...

  • Page 882

    Examples 4.2 Coordinate systems Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4.2 Coordinate systems Configuring a global basic frame An NC with 2 channels is required. The following applies: • The global basic frame can then be written b...

  • Page 883

    Examples 4.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-5 Part program in first channel Code (excerpt) Comment . . . N100 $P_NCBFR[0] = CTRANS( x, 10 ) ; Activation of the NC global basic frame . . . N130 $P_NCBFRAME[0] = CROT...

  • Page 884

    Examples 4.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 4-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example 2 Channel axes 4, 5 and 6 become the geometry axes of a 5axis orientation transformation. The geometry axes are thus all substituted before the transformation. The c...

  • Page 885

    Examples 4.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-7 Program: $P_NCBFRAME[0] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6) $P_CHBFRAME[0] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6) $P_IFRAME = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6):crot(z,45) $P_PFRAME =...

  • Page 886

    Examples 4.3 Frames Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 4-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 887

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Memory specific machine data Number Identifier: $MM_ Description HMI Advanced HMI Embedded 9242 MA_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE Numerical basis for display of movin...

  • Page 888

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MM_ Description and locationdependent offsets 9450 9450 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for wear fine 9451 9451 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit ...

  • Page 889

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_CODE M code for transformation changeover 24000 FRAME_ADD_COMPONENTS Separate programming/modification of add...

  • Page 890

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.2 Setting data 5.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42440 FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG Zero offsets are traversed on incremental progr...

  • Page 891

    Data lists 5.4 Signals Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 Names Description $P_TRAFRAME Current system frame for transformations $P_CHBFRAME[n] Current basic frame in channel, 0 to 15 NCU basic frames can be configured via machi...

  • Page 892

    Data lists 5.4 Signals Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.4.2 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 3.0 Zero offset external 31, ... 60.0 Spindle/no axis 5.4.3 Signals to axis/spindle DB number By...

  • Page 893

    Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A Actual-value system workpiecerelated, 2-111 ATRANS, 1-5 Axis configuration, 2-13 B Basic coordinate system (BCS), 1-3, 2-26 C CFINE, 1-5 Channel axes, 2-4 Configurable SZS, 2-34 CTRAN...

  • Page 894

    Index Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames (K2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD24020, 2-55 MD24030, 2-34, 2-53 MD24040, 2-87 MD24050, 2-50 MD24110, 2-17 MD24120, 2-17 MD24805, 2-76 MD24855, 2-76 MD24905, 2-69 MD28080, 2-51, 2-56 MD28081, 2-51 MD28082, 2-29, 2-5...

  • Page 895

    899,Brief Description 899, 899,1 901,Detailed description 901, 901,2 909,Restrictions 909, 909,3 911,Examples 911, 911, 911,4 913,Data lists 913, 913,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Valid for Cont...

  • Page 896

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 897

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 899,1-1 2 Detailed description ..................

  • Page 898

    Table of contents Emergency Stop (N2) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 899

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Function The control system supports the machine manufacturer in implementing an emergency stop function on the basis of the following functions: • An emergency stop button is installed in a locatio...

  • Page 900

    Brief Description Emergency Stop (N2) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 901

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Relevant standards Relevant standards Compliance with the following standards is essential for the emergency stop function: • EN 292 Part 1 • EN 292 Part 2 • EN 418 • EN 60204 Part 1:19...

  • Page 902

    Detailed description 2.2 Emergency stop control elements Emergency Stop (N2) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Exceptions No emergency stop device is required on machines: • Where an emergency stop device would not reduce the risk, either because the shutdown time woul...

  • Page 903

    Detailed description 2.3 Emergency stop sequence Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Emergency stop button and control Actuation of the emergency stop button or a signal derived directly from the button must be routed to the controller (PLC) as a PLC inp...

  • Page 904

    Detailed description 2.3 Emergency stop sequence Emergency Stop (N2) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2. Reset interface signal DB11, ... DBX6.3 (Mode group ready). 3. Set the interface signal: DB10, DBX106.1 (Emergency stop active). 4. Alarm: "3000 Emergency Stop&q...

  • Page 905

    Detailed description 2.4 Emergency stop acknowledgement Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Note If the sequence in the NC is not to be executed during an emergency stop as described above, then the interface signal must not be set until an emergency s...

  • Page 906

    Detailed description 2.4 Emergency stop acknowledgement Emergency Stop (N2) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 123 Figure 2-1 Resetting the emergency stop state (1) DB10, DBX56.2 (acknowledge emergency stop) is inoperative (2) DB21, ... DBX7.7 (Reset) is inoperative (3) D...

  • Page 907

    Detailed description 2.4 Emergency stop acknowledgement Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 POWER OFF / ON (supply off / on) The emergency stop state can also be reset by switching the controller off and back on (POWER OFF / ON). Prerequisite: When power...

  • Page 908

    Detailed description 2.4 Emergency stop acknowledgement Emergency Stop (N2) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 909

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Restrictions 3No supplementary conditions apply.

  • Page 910

    Restrictions Emergency Stop (N2) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 911

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 912

    Examples Emergency Stop (N2) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 913

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Drive-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MD_ Description 1404 PULSE_SUPPRESSION_DELAY Time for pulse suppression 5.1.2 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $M...

  • Page 914

    Data lists 5.2 Signals Emergency Stop (N2) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.2.2 Signals from NC DB number Byte.Bit Description 10 106.1 EMERGENCY STOP active 5.2.3 Signals to BAG DB number Byte.Bit Description 11, ... 0.7 Mode group RESET

  • Page 915

    Emergency Stop (N2) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index D DB 31, ... DBB60.5, 2-6 DB10 DBB4, 2-4 DBB5, 2-4 DBB6, 2-4 DBB7, 2-4 DBX 56.1, 2-4 DBX106.1, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6 DBX56.1, 2-3, 2-5, 2-7 DBX56.2, 2-3, 2-5 DB11, ... DBX0.7, 2-5 DBX6.3, 2-4, 2-6 DB21, ... DBX7.7, 2-...

  • Page 916

    Index Emergency Stop (N2) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 917

    921,Brief description 921, 921, 921,1 923,Detailed Description 923, 923,2 933,Supplementary conditions 933, 933, 933,3 935,Examples 935, 935, 935,4 937,Data lists 937, 937,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0BP1...

  • Page 918

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 919

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 921,1-1 2 Detailed Description..................

  • Page 920

    Table of contents Transverse axes (P1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 921

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1Within the framework of "turning" technology, the transverse axis refers to the machine axis that travels perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the spindle, in other words, to longitudin...

  • Page 922

    Brief description Transverse axes (P1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DIAM*: DIAMOF, DIAMON, DIAM90, DIAMCYCOF DIAM*A[AX]: DIAMOFA[AX], DIAMONA[AX], DIAM90A[AX], DIACYCOFA[AX], DIAMCHANA[AX] AX: Axis identifier for geometry/channel or machine axis identifier Rotary...

  • Page 923

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed Description 22.1 Defining a geometry axis as transverse axis Transverse axis Within the framework of "turning" technology, the transverse axis refers to the machine axis that travels perpendicular to...

  • Page 924

    Detailed Description 2.1 Defining a geometry axis as transverse axis Transverse axes (P1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 With: • MD20100, the function G96/G961/G962 is assigned to the transverse axis during power up. • MD20100, the channel-specific diameter program...

  • Page 925

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes can be programed with respect to both diameter and radius. Generally, they are diame...

  • Page 926

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The additionally specified axis must be activated via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK with bit2=1. The axis specified must be a known axis in ...

  • Page 927

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Initial setting The following machine data is used to parameterize the initial setting: MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES [28] (initial setting of the...

  • Page 928

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DIAMCYCOF/DIACYCOFA[AX] Just as for DIAMCYCOF, a changeover to radius programing takes place within the controller for DIACYCOFA[AX]. The diameter p...

  • Page 929

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 DRF-traveling with handwheel For all transverse axes, MD11346 $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE == 1 for bit9=0: causes the half path of the specified handw...

  • Page 930

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Settable response of geometry axes for traveling with handwheel If the geometry axis is traveled as a transverse axis in the channel for handwheel t...

  • Page 931

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9

  • Page 932

    Detailed Description 2.2 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes (P1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 933

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 934

    Supplementary conditions Transverse axes (P1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 935

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 936

    Examples Transverse axes (P1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 937

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[n] Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis 20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n] Geometry ...

  • Page 938

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Transverse axes (P1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 939

    Transverse axes (P1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A assigning the reference axis via SCC[AX] for G96/G961/G962, 2-2 C channel-specific basic position after power up, RESET, 2-2 Channel-specific diameter programming, 2-3 Constant cutting rate, 2-1 D DIACYCOFA...

  • Page 940

    Index Transverse axes (P1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 W Work offset $P_EXTFRAME, 2-7 Work offset external, 2-7

  • Page 941

    947,Brief description 947, 947, 947,1 949,Detailed description 949, 949,2 1195,Supplementary conditions 1195, 1195, 1195,3 1197,Examples 1197, 1197, 1197,4 1199,Data lists 1199, 1199,5SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D PLC basic program powerline pl) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6F...

  • Page 942

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 943

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 947,1-1 2 Detailed description...

  • Page 944

    Table of contents PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector .................................................................... 1020,2-72 2.11.1 Supplementary conditions...........................

  • Page 945

    Table of contents PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 2.14.4 Multiinstance DB .................................................................................................................... 1191,2-243 2.14.5 Strings.......................

  • Page 946

    Table of contents PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 947

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1General The PLC basic program organizes the exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and the NCK (Numerical Control Kernel), HMI (Human-Machine Interface) and MCP (Mac...

  • Page 948

    Brief description PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Event-driven signal exchange PLC → NCK An "eventdriven signal exchange PLC → NCK" takes place whenever the PLC passes a request to the NCK (e.g., traversal of an auxili...

  • Page 949

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di The tables below show the performance range of the PLC CPUs and the scope of the basic PLC program relative to the various controller ...

  • Page 950

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 810D / 840D 810D / 840D 810D / 840D (addressing) - digital - analog I/O devices: from I/O byte 32 onwards from PI/PO byte 384 onwards ...

  • Page 951

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 840Di 810D 840D Program/data blocks OB FB FC DB 1, 10, 20, 35, 40, 80-82, 85-87, 100, 121-122 0-255 0-255 1-399 1, 10, 20, 35, 40...

  • Page 952

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Types of control: 840Di and 840D Key CPU data 840Di 840D PLC CPU MLFB Integrated PLC 317-2DP master/slave 6FC5 317-2AJ10-0AB0 Int...

  • Page 953

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 840Di 840D slots DP master system: DP 1 1 DP master system: MPI/DP 2 N/A PBC (programmable block communication) Yes Yes Consistent...

  • Page 954

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PLC versions In SW 3.5 and higher on the 840D, version 6 (version code 35.06.03) is installed with PLC 314 and version 3 (version code ...

  • Page 955

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Module codes The table below shows the relationship between the module code and the corresponding PLC module, the suitable PLC operatin...

  • Page 956

    Detailed description 2.2 Reserve resources (timers, FC, FB, DB, I/O) PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 840Di 810D 840D PI services + + + Tool management + + + Star/delta switchover + + + Display control handheld unit + + + 1) Depends o...

  • Page 957

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 I/O range Component Reserved range Address area 256 - 271 1) Inputs/outputs 4096 upwards2) 1) Reserved for the NC module and futu...

  • Page 958

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 STEP7 Version 5.1 SP2 and Toolbox 6.03.02 With STEP7 V5.1 SP2 and Toolbox 6.03.02 or later, the SINUMERIK components are stored u...

  • Page 959

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 NCU MLFB Comparable SIMATIC CPU MLFB included Selection from STEP7 hardware catalog SINUMERIK 840D NCU 572 (export version) ...

  • Page 960

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NCU MLFB Comparable SIMATIC CPU MLFB included Selection from STEP7 hardware catalog SINUMERIK 840D NCU 573.2 (Pentium Pro) u...

  • Page 961

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 NCU MLFB Comparable SIMATIC CPU MLFB included Selection from STEP7 hardware catalog SINUMERIK 840D NCU 561.3 6FC5356-0BB11-0...

  • Page 962

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-1 Hardware configuration of row 0 on 810D, 840D MCP (Machine Control Panel) and HHU (HandHeld Unit) (only for SINUMERIK...

  • Page 963

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 2.4 Starting up the PLC program 2.4.1 Installing the basic program for 810D, 840D Before initial startup of the NC, an NC and PLC general reset must...

  • Page 964

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 STEP7 V2.x, 3.x The basic program is stored as a compressed file with the name "GP840D.EXE" in directory S7V2.840 or S7V2.810 or S7V2 on ...

  • Page 965

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 2. File GPOB840D.AWL (or GPOB810D.AWL or GPOBFMNC.AWL) and other STL (AWL) files if appropriate must also be copied from the basic program catalog i...

  • Page 966

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The version is shown in decades 3 and 4 of the display (bold type). The two leftaligned decades contain the control type of this basic program. The ...

  • Page 967

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 2.4.5 Data backup The PLC CPU does not store symbolic names, only the data-type descriptions of the block parameters (VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_...

  • Page 968

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Function Magic(bstrVal As String) As Long Call gives access to certain functions. The function must be called once after server instantiation. The v...

  • Page 969

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 2.4.7 Software upgrades Software upgrade Whenever you update the PLC or NCK software, always reset the PLC to its initial state first. This initial ...

  • Page 970

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.8 I/O modules (FM, CP modules) Special packages for STEP7 are generally required for more complex I/O modules. Some of these special packages in...

  • Page 971

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Errors, cause/description and remedy Serial no. error information Error Cause/description Remedy performed. The diagnostic buffer can then be rea...

  • Page 972

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.2 Interface on 810D and 840D with integrated PLC Physical interfaces As the 810D and 840D systems have an integrated PLC, signals can be exch...

  • Page 973

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 NCK/PLC interface NCK/PLC data exchange is organized by the basic program in the PLC. The status information (e.g., "Program running")...

  • Page 974

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MCP/PLC interface, HHU/PLC interface (810D only) Data exchange between MCP/PLC and HHU/PLC takes place via the MPI interface on the PLC. The Comm...

  • Page 975

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Alarm/Message Number The two least significant digits of Event ID 16# B046 contain the code for the most significant decimal places of the alarm ...

  • Page 976

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6 Interface structure 2.6.1 PLC/NCK interface General The PLC/NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other. ...

  • Page 977

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Figure 2-3 PLC/NCK interface Compile-cycle signals In addition to the standard signals exchanged between the PLC and NCK, an interface DB for compile cycle...

  • Page 978

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signals PLC/NC The group of signals from the PLC to NC includes: • Signals for modifying the highspeed digital I/O signals of the NC • Keyswitch and eme...

  • Page 979

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Figure 2-4 PLC/NC interface Digital/analog inputs/outputs of the NCK The following must be noted with respect to the digital and analog inputs and outputs ...

  • Page 980

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The NCK can also transfer signals or values to the PLC even if there is no hardware for this channel on the NCK side. • The values transferred by the ...

  • Page 981

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Auxiliary functions and G functions are entered in the interface data blocks in two ways. First, they are entered with the change signals. • M signalsM00...

  • Page 982

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-6 PLC/NC channel interface PLC/axis, spindle, drive signals The axis-specific and spindle-specific signals are divided into the following groups: ...

  • Page 983

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Figure 2-7 Interface between PLC and axes/spindles/drives 2.6.2 PLC/MMC interface General The following groups of functions are required for the PLC/MMC in...

  • Page 984

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Machine operation All operator inputs, which lead to response actions on the machine, are monitored by the PLC. Operator actions are usually performed on th...

  • Page 985

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 • Bit fields for events related to the VDI interface are combined in a single data block (DB2) with bit fields for user messages. • Bit fields are evalu...

  • Page 986

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-8 Acquisition and signaling of PLC events 2.6.3 PLC/MCP/HHU interface General On the SINUMERIK 840D/810D, the machine control panel (MCP) is conne...

  • Page 987

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 The signals arriving from the machine control panel are copied by the COM module into the DPR (dualport RAM) for transfer to the NC. The NC in turn transmit...

  • Page 988

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-10 Connection of the machine control panel for 810D Bus addresses The default bus addresses for the standard configurations are entered in the &qu...

  • Page 989

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 MCP interface in the PLC The signals from the machine control panel are routed via the I/O area by default. A distinction is made between NC and machinespec...

  • Page 990

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program 2.7.1 Startup and synchronization of NCK PLC Loading the basic program The basic p...

  • Page 991

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 • Transmission of the machine control panel signals via the NCK (on the 840D only) • Acquisition and conditioning of the user e...

  • Page 992

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The M, S, T, H, D and F values sent by the NCK are output together with the accompanying change signals to the CHANNEL DB interface...

  • Page 993

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 2.7.3 Time-alarm processing (OB 35) General The user must program OB 35 for time-alarm processing. The default time base setting of...

  • Page 994

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Auxiliary-function modification signals are also reset. Auxiliary-function values: Auxiliary-function values are retained so that i...

  • Page 995

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 Note The following note will later help you to check and diagnose a function call (FCs, FBs of basic program). These are FCs and ...

  • Page 996

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Once prepared in this way, it can be started at any time from the PLC. The NC program running on the channel in question is interru...

  • Page 997

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 2.7.7 Symbolic programming of user program with interface DB General Note With basic program SW 3.2 and higher, files NST_UDT.STL...

  • Page 998

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description Abbreviated symbolic names of the interface signals are defined in the two STL files NST_UDT.AWL and TM_UDT.AWL. In o...

  • Page 999

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 The M functions are decoded. Once they are entered in the decoding list, then the associated bit in the signal list is set. When th...

  • Page 1000

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The bit address is generated correspondingly from the first M function ("MFirstAdr") to the last M function ("MLastA...

  • Page 1001

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 Signal list Data block DB 76 is set up when the function is activated. A bit is set in the appropriate group in DB 76 for an M sig...

  • Page 1002

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MSigGrp[3].MExtAdr := 40; MSigGrp[3].MFirstAdr := L#55; MSigGrp[3].MLastAdr := L#55; END_DATA_BLOCK 2.7.9 PLC machine data G...

  • Page 1003

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 Figure 2-13 DB 20 Note If the number of PLC machine data used is increased later, then DB20 must be deleted beforehand. To preve...

  • Page 1004

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example The project in the example requires 4 integer values, 2 hexadecimal fields with bit information and 1 real value. Machine d...

  • Page 1005

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 TYPE UDT 20 STRUCT UDInt : ARRAY [0 .. 3 ] OF INT ; UDHex0 : ARRAY [0 .. 15]OF BOOL; UDReal : ARRAY [0 .. 0 ] OF REAL ; //D...

  • Page 1006

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.10 Configuration of machine control panel, handheld unit General The communications system integrated in the NC permits a maxi...

  • Page 1007

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 Control signals Parameters MCP1Stop, MCP2Stop and BHGStop can be used to stop communication with individual components (parameter s...

  • Page 1008

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Configuring There are basically two communication mechanisms for transferring data between the MCP/HHU and PLC. With the first mech...

  • Page 1009

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU BHGSendGBZNo BHGSendObjNo BHGMPI = FALSE (OPI), TRUE (MPI) BHGStop Status information A...

  • Page 1010

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-15 840D: MPI connection for HHU Relevant parameters (FB1): Communication between the PLC and HHU is implemented through ...

  • Page 1011

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 Figure 2-16 MPI connection Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCPNum=1 or 2 (number of MCPs) BHG=2 (transfer via COM module) MCP1I...

  • Page 1012

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 An error entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for timeouts (bits 10 and 27), resulting in the following error messages ...

  • Page 1013

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 Status information Available in Bit No. Description MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec BHGStatRec 10 Receiver: Time out An error entry is als...

  • Page 1014

    Detailed description 2.8 SPL for Safety Integrated PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCP1StatRec (n.r.) MCP2StatRec (n.r.) BHGStatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr BHGInLen MCP1Timeout (n.r.) MCP2Timeout (n.r....

  • Page 1015

    Detailed description 2.9 Assignment overview PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 2.9.2 Assignment: FB/FC FB number FC number Meaning 1 Basic program 2 - 29 Reserved for Siemens 1 Initialization of basic program 2 - 29 Reserved for S...

  • Page 1016

    Detailed description 2.9 Assignment overview PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Overview of data blocks DB no. Designation Name Package 1 Reserved for Siemens BP 4 PLC-MELD PLC messages BP 8 Reserved for Siemens 9 NC-COMPILE Interfa...

  • Page 1017

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 ManualTurn ManualTurn uses FC 30 to 35 and DB 81 to 89. ManualTurn is an operating system for conventional, cyclecontro...

  • Page 1018

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Memory requirements of blocks with SINUMERIK 840D Block size (bytes) Block type no. Function Remark Load memory Wor...

  • Page 1019

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 810D, 840D PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 Basic program options Concurrent axes FC 15 Positioning of linear/rotary axes Load for axis positioning by PLC 656 546...

  • Page 1020

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block size (bytes) Block type no. Function Remark Load memory Working memory Minimum configuration (1 spindle, 2 axes and TMCP...

  • Page 1021

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 Minimum Recommendation Processor 80486 Pentium RAM (MB) 32 Or more Hard disk, free capacity (MB) 200 > 400 Interfaces MPI inc...

  • Page 1022

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 – Allocation of symbolic names (also for variables in data blocks) – Input and output of comments within each block – Printo...

  • Page 1023

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 2.11.1.3 Relevant SINUMERIK documents References: /IAD/840D, 611D Installation and Startup Guide; PLC Interface /IAG/810D, 611D In...

  • Page 1024

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-18 NC VAR selector After the "NC VAR selector" application has been started, select a list of variables of an ...

  • Page 1025

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 Note The latest version of the "NC VAR selector" is capable of processing all previous NC software versions. It is not ...

  • Page 1026

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note A *.awl file contains the names and alias names of the NC variables, as well as information about their address parameters. ...

  • Page 1027

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 Creating a new project A new project (new file for selected variables) can be set up under the "Project" menu item. A wi...

  • Page 1028

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 If, after selection of the project, new variables are to be added, a complete list of NCK variables must be selected (see: Selecti...

  • Page 1029

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 Selecting an NC variable list A list of all the NC variables for an NC version can now be selected and displayed via the "NC ...

  • Page 1030

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 There are three options: • Display all data • Input area, block and name (incl. combinations) • Display MD/SE data number Th...

  • Page 1031

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 Figure 2-25 Screen with complete list and selected variables Scrolling A scroll bar is displayed if it is not possible to display...

  • Page 1032

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Delete variables Variables are deleted in the window of selected variables by selecting the appropriate variables (single mouse cl...

  • Page 1033

    Detailed description 2.11 Supplementary conditions and NC VAR selector PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 Code generation This menu item contains three selection options: 1. Settings (input of data block number to be generated) and othe...

  • Page 1034

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.2.3 Startup, installation The Windows application "NC Var selector" is installed using the SETUP program supplied with the package. 2.12 Blo...

  • Page 1035

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 Note An additional SDB 210 must be generated via the STEP7 Communication Configuration application for the operator components connected on the MPI interf...

  • Page 1036

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Code Comment MCPSDB210: BOOL:= FALSE; MCPCopyDB77: BOOL:= FALSE; MCPBusType: BYTE = 0; HHU: INT ; //Handheld unit interface //0: No HHU //1: HH...

  • Page 1037

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 Description of formal parameters 810D, 840D The table below lists all formal parameters of the RUN_UP function for 810D, 840D: Signal I/O Type Value range ...

  • Page 1038

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks and MCP2 HHU I Int HHU interface 0: No HHU 1: HHU to MPI with SDB 210 configuration (for SW V3.x): 2: HHU to OPI or MPI...

  • Page 1039

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks 1: Receive HHU signals only (under development) NCCyclTimeout I S5time Recommendation: 200 ms Cyclic sign-of-life monito...

  • Page 1040

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks ActivAxis Q ARRAY[1..31] OF BOOL Bit string for active axes UDInt Q Int Quantity of integer machine data in DB 20 UDHe...

  • Page 1041

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 Code Comment MaxBAG: INT ; MaxChan: INT ; MaxAxis: INT ; ActivChan: ARRAY[1..10] OF BOOL; ActivAxis: ARRAY[1.0.31] OF BOOL; UDInt : INT ; ...

  • Page 1042

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks 1: Receive machine control panel signals only HHU I Int Handheld unit interface 0: No HHU 1: HHU on MPI with SDB 210 c...

  • Page 1043

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks 200 ms monitoring NCK NCRunupTimeout I S5time Recommendation: 50 s Powerup monitoring NCK ListMDecGrp I INT 0...16 NCK...

  • Page 1044

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks UDInt Q Int Quantity of integer machine data in DB20 UDHex Q Int Quantity of hexadecimal machine data in DB20 UDReal Q...

  • Page 1045

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 OB100_OB_NUMBR : BYTE ; OB100_RESERVED_1 : BYTE ; OB100_RESERVED_2 : BYTE ; OB100_STOP : WORD ; OB100_RESERVED_3 : WORD ; OB100_RESERVED_4 : WORD ; O...

  • Page 1046

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS, NC-CyclTimeout := S5T#200MS, NC-RunupTimeout := S5T#50S); //INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK 2.12.2 FB 2: Read ...

  • Page 1047

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 Note After communication between the PLC and NC (read/write NC variables, FB2, 3, 5, or PI general services, FB4) has been aborted by POWER OFF, the start ...

  • Page 1048

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Unit3 : BYTE ; Column3 : WORD ; Line3 : WORD ; Addr4 : ANY ; Unit4 : BYTE ; Column4 : WORD ; Line4 : WORD ; Addr5 : ANY ; Unit5 : BYTE ; ...

  • Page 1049

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 Description of formal parameters The table below list all formal parameters of the GET function. Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Req I Bool Job start...

  • Page 1050

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L 0 9 Transmission occupied Job must be repeated 1 to 8 10 Error in variable addressing Unit or column/line contains valu...

  • Page 1051

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 Select data with NC VAR selector and store in file DB120.VAR; then create file DB120.AWL: Area Block Name Type No. Byte S7 Name C[1] M MD20070: AXCONF_MAC...

  • Page 1052

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 pind, Error := M102.0, NDR := M100.1, State := MW104, RD1 := P#DB99.DBX0.0 BYTE 1, RD2 := P#DB99.DBX1.0 BYTE 1, RD3 := P#M110.0 INT 1); Example: Vari...

  • Page 1053

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 Data types The data types of the NCK are listed in the NCVAR selector with the variables. The tables below give the assignments to the S7 data types. Clas...

  • Page 1054

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 checked for a "0" in the FB. If a "0" is present, the value is transferred to the input parameter. The user must supply the required pa...

  • Page 1055

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 3 VAR_INPUT Req : BOOL ; NumVar : INT ; Addr1 : ANY ; Unit1 : BYTE ; Column1 : WORD ; Line1 : WORD ; Addr2 : ANY ; U...

  • Page 1056

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SD6 : ANY ; SD7 : ANY ; SD8 : ANY ; END_VAR Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the PUT function. Signal I...

  • Page 1057

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter "NCKomm" is not set...

  • Page 1058

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call example Writing of three channelspecific machine data of channel 1: Select the three data with NC VAR selector and store in the file DB120.VAR: Area ...

  • Page 1059

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 Example: Variable addressing Writing of two R parameters of channel 1, whose address specifications are stored in DB 120 as the basic type. The R parameter...

  • Page 1060

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The specified service is referenced via the PIService parameter. The selected PI service is supplied via the freely assignable additional input variables w...

  • Page 1061

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 Description of formal parameters The following table shows all formal parameters of the function PI_SERV. Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Req I Bool ...

  • Page 1062

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function (2) Positive acknowledgment: PI service has been executed (3) Reset function activation after receipt of ack...

  • Page 1063

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-115 PI service Function Available in 840D/810DCRCEDN Create new cutting edge x DELECE Delete a cutting edge x TMFPBP Empty location search x TSEARC Complex ...

  • Page 1064

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-116 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PI service: ASUB Assign interrupt Function: A program stored on the NCK is assigned an interrupt signal for a channel. This is possible only if the file ma...

  • Page 1065

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-117 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.FINDBL Block search Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD x Preprocessing mode x: Describe...

  • Page 1066

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-118 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PI service: CANCEL Execute cancel Function: The CANCEL command activates the Cancel function (in accordance with key on MMC). Parameterization Signal Type...

  • Page 1067

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-119 PI service: CREACE Create cutting edge Function: Creation of the cutting edge with the next higher/next unassigned D number for the tool with the transferr...

  • Page 1068

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-120 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning T number > 0 means a T number must be specified T number = -1 means that the NCK should allocate a T nu...

  • Page 1069

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-121 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.TMFDPL Empty location for loading Unit INT 1, 2 TOA WVar1 INT T number WVar2 INT Loca...

  • Page 1070

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-122 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 When location_number_to = -1, an empty location for the tool specified by a T number is first sought in the specified magazine and the magazine then traver...

  • Page 1071

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-123 The PI service makes a magazine location, which can be qualified in various ways, traverse in front of a specified load location. The load location must b...

  • Page 1072

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-124 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.LOGIN Create password Unit INT 1 NCK Addr1 STRING 8 characters Password PI service: LO...

  • Page 1073

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-125 Parameter: WVar1=FunctionNumber This function number represents a PI service: 1: TMCRTO (create tool) 2: TMFDPL (search for empty location for loading):...

  • Page 1074

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-126 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.CRCEDN Create new cutting edge Unit INT TOA WVar1 INT T number of tool for which cuttin...

  • Page 1075

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-127 Empty location search TMFPBP Function: (dependent on parameter assignment) See description in FB 7. Complex search using search screen forms TSEARC Functio...

  • Page 1076

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-128 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MagNrFrom PlaceNrFrom MagNrTo PlaceNrTo Search area #M1 #P1 -1 -1 All locations starting at magazine #M1 and location #P1 are searched #M1 #P1 #M1 -1 Loca...

  • Page 1077

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-129 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning WVar4 INT PlaceNrTo Location number of location in magazine MagNrTo, at which search must end WVar5 INT ...

  • Page 1078

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-130 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Reset active status TMRASS Function: Resetting the active status on worn tools This PI service is used to search for all tools with the tool status active...

  • Page 1079

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-131 Digitizing on (DIGION) Function: Selecting digitizing in the specified channel Parameterization: Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.DIGION D...

  • Page 1080

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-132 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DATA_BLOCK DB 126 //Unassigned user DB, as instance for FB 4 FB 4 BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK DATA_BLOCK db 124 struct PName: string[32]:= '_N_TEST_MPF '; Pat...

  • Page 1081

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-133 2.12.5 FB 5: GETGUD read GUD variable Description of Functions The PLC user program can read a GUD variable (GUD = Global User Data) from the NCK or channe...

  • Page 1082

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-134 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 5 //Server name KNOW_HOW_PROTECT VERSION : 3.0 VAR_INPUT Req : bool; Addr: any; //Variables name string Area: byte;...

  • Page 1083

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-135 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Variable has the value 0 if no field index is used. Index2 I Int Field index 2 of variable Variable has the value 0 if...

  • Page 1084

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-136 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Configuration steps To be able to read a GUD variable, its name must be stored in a string variable. The data block with this string variable must be defin...

  • Page 1085

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-137 type : byte; length : byte; END_STRUCT; END_STRUCT; BEGIN END_DATA_BLOCK DATA_BLOCK DB 111 //Unassigned user DB, as instance for FB 5 FB 5 BEGIN EN...

  • Page 1086

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-138 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 7 Var_INPUT Req : BOOL ; PIService : ANY ; Unit : INT ; Addr1 : ANY ; Addr2 : ANY ; Addr3 : ANY ; Addr4 : ANY ; WVar...

  • Page 1087

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-139 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks job impossible Done Q Bool Job has been executed successfully State Q Word See error identifiers Overview of additio...

  • Page 1088

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-140 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MagazineNumber _From LocationNumber_From MagazineNumber_To LocationNumber_To Search area #M1 #P1 #M1 -1 Locations in magazine #M1 starting at magazine ...

  • Page 1089

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-141 Parameterization Signal Type Value range Meaning direction WVar10 INT 0, 1 .. 7 Number of required half locations in downward direction WVar11 INT 0, 1 ....

  • Page 1090

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-142 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Brief description of a few important functions Active/passive operating mode An online MMC can operate in two different modes: Active mode: Operator can c...

  • Page 1091

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-143 Declaration of function FUNKTION_BLOCK FB9 VAR_INPUT Ack :BOOL; //Acknowledge alarms OPMixedMode: BOOL:= FALSE; // Hybrid operation with non-M-to-N-en...

  • Page 1092

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-144 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The block must be called by the user program. The user must provide an instance DB with any number for this purpose. The call is not multiinstanceca...

  • Page 1093

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-145 MCP1StatRec := P#Q 12.0, MCP1BusAdr := 255, // Address of first MCP MCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS, MCP1Stop := TRUE, // MCP disabled NCCyclTimeout := S5T#20...

  • Page 1094

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-146 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SpindleIFNo := B#16#0, FeedHold := M 101.0, SpindleHold := M 101.1); wei2: NOP 0; 2.12.8 FB 10: Safety relay (SI relay) Description of Functions The S...

  • Page 1095

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-147

  • Page 1096

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-148 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 10 VAR_INPUT In1 : BOOL := True ; //Input 1 In2 : BOOL := True ; //Input 2 In3 : BOOL := True ; //In...

  • Page 1097

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-149 Description of formal parameters The following table shows all formal parameters of the SI relay function. Formal parameters of SI relay function Signal I...

  • Page 1098

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-150 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The brake test must always be started when the axis is at a standstill. For the entire duration of the brake test, the enable signals of the parameterized ...

  • Page 1099

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-151 TV_Bclose : S5TIME ; //TimeValue -> close brake TV_FeedCommand : S5TIME //TimeValue -> force FeedCommand TV_FXSreached : S5TIME ; //TimeValue -...

  • Page 1100

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-152 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Error identifiers Error identifiers State Meaning 0 No error 1 Start conditions not fulfilled, e.g., axis not under closedloop control/brake closed/axis d...

  • Page 1101

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-153 S DBX 28.7; //Request PLC-monitored axis V DBX 63.1; //Checkback signal, axis monitored by PLC V M 110.5; FP M 110.2; R M 110.5; S M 111.0; //Start brak...

  • Page 1102

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-154 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Pos := -5.000000e+000, //Traversing distance: Minus 5 mm FRate := 1.000000e+003, //Feedrate: 1000 mm/min InPos :=M 113.0, //Position reached Error :...

  • Page 1103

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-155 Signal_1 : BOOL ; Signal_2 : BOOL ; Signal_3 : BOOL ; Signal_4 : BOOL ; Signal_5 : BOOL ; Signal_6 : BOOL ; Signal_7 : BOOL ; Signal_8 : BOOL ; New...

  • Page 1104

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-156 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the Diagnostics function: Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Func I Int 0...

  • Page 1105

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-157 Func := 1, Signal_1 :=M 100.0, Signal_2 :=M 100.1, Signal_3 :=M 100.2, Signal_4 :=M 100.3, Signal_5 :=M 10.4, Signal_6 :=M 100.5, Sig...

  • Page 1106

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-158 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 OB1_MAX_CYCLE : INT ; OB1_DATE_TIME : DATE_AND_TIME; END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 2; //Call basic program as first FC //INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE CALL FC 19 ( ...

  • Page 1107

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-159 To be able to implement highspeed, jobcontrolled processing of the user program for the machine, the following NC functions are available in the interrupt ...

  • Page 1108

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-160 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION FC 3: VOID //No parameters Call example As far as the time is concerned, the basic program must be executed before other interrupt-dri...

  • Page 1109

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-161 2.12.13 FC 5: GP_DIAG Basic program, diagnostic alarm, and module failure Description of functions Description of functions Module defects and module failu...

  • Page 1110

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-162 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 OB82_NO_CONFIG : BOOL ; OB82_CONFIG_ERR : BOOL ; OB82_MDL_TYPE : BYTE ; OB82_SUB_NDL_ERR : BOOL ; OB82_COMM_FAULT : BOOL ; OB82_MDL_STOP...

  • Page 1111

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-163 2.12.14 FC 7: TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with revolver Description of Functions After a revolver has been changed, the user will call this bloc...

  • Page 1112

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-164 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Manual revolver switching If a manual action is used to rotate the revolver, this information must be forwarded to the tool management. The asynchronous tr...

  • Page 1113

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-165 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks 1: No revolver present 2: Illegal revolver number in parameter "ChgdRevNo"3: Illegal job ("interface act...

  • Page 1114

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-166 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.15 FC 8: TM_TRANS transfer block for tool management Description of Functions In the case of changed tool positions or status changes, the user will c...

  • Page 1115

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-167 The "Start" parameter does not need a signal edge for a subsequent job. This means that new parameters can be assigned with "Start = TRUE&qu...

  • Page 1116

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-168 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NewToolMag: INT ; NewToolLoc: INT ; OldToolMag: INT ; OldToolLoc: INT ; Status: INT ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Ready: BOOL ; Error : INT ; END_VAR BE...

  • Page 1117

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-169 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Other values: The number corresponds to the error message of the tool management function in the NCK caused by this t...

  • Page 1118

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-170 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3. In the case of "Change" (spindle or revolver), the tools addressed in the interface have now reached the required target addresses. The tool-...

  • Page 1119

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-171 Status = 6: The tool management job is completed. This status has the same function as status 1, but, in addition, a reservation of the source location is...

  • Page 1120

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-172 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Status definition A general rule for the acknowledgment status is that the state information 1 to 7 leads to the termination of the command. If FC 8 receiv...

  • Page 1121

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-173 2.12.16 FC 9: ASUB startup of asynchronous subprograms Description of Functions The FC ASUB can be used to trigger any functions in the NC. Before an ASUB ...

  • Page 1122

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-174 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the ASUB function. Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Start I Bool Chan...

  • Page 1123

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-175 Call example CALL FC 9 ( //Start an asynchronous subroutine //in channel 1 interrupt number 1 Start := I 45.7, ChanNo := 1, IntNo := 1, Active := M 20...

  • Page 1124

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-176 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Error and operational messages are provided by the user in data block DB 2. Note In DB 2, a "1" signal must be present for several OB1 cycles ...

  • Page 1125

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-177 2.12.18 FC 12: AUXFU call interface for user with auxiliary functions Description of Functions FC AUXFU is generally called on an eventdriven basis in the ...

  • Page 1126

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-178 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example FUNCTION FC 12: VOID //Event control of auxiliary functions VAR_INPUT Chan: BYTE ; //Parameter is supplied by basic program END_VAR VAR_TEMP Cha...

  • Page 1127

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-179 Additional parameters The pointer parameters for the input and output data of the handheld unit must be parameterized in the start OB 100 in FB 1, DB 7. Pa...

  • Page 1128

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-180 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the BHGDisp function: Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Row I Byte 0-3 ...

  • Page 1129

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-181 Call example CALL FC 13 ( Row := MB 26, ChrArray := "strdat".disp, //DB with name strdat in //data element symbol table //disp is declared as ...

  • Page 1130

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-182 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Rotary axes can be positioned by the shortest possible route through the programming of a negative feed value in absolute programming mode. In increm...

  • Page 1131

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-183 Error identifiers State Meaning 109 Corresponds to alarm no.: 22055 110 Velocity/speed is negative 111 Setpoint speed is zero 112 Invalid gear stage 115 Pr...

  • Page 1132

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-184 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the POS_AX function: Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Start I Bool Ax...

  • Page 1133

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-185 (1) Activation of function (2) Positioning axes active (3) Positive acknowledgment: Position reached (4) Reset function activation after receipt of ack...

  • Page 1134

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-186 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.21 FC 16: PART_AX positioning of indexing axes Description of Functions (Do not use for new applications, function is integrated in FC 18 in SW 3.6 an...

  • Page 1135

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-187 Warning If several block calls (FC 15, FC 16, FC 18) are programmed for the same axis/spindle in the PLC user program, then the functions concerned must b...

  • Page 1136

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-188 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks rotary axes Pos I Int 1 to 60 No. of indexing position FRate I Real  0,1469368 I -38 to  0,1701412 I +39 Feedrat...

  • Page 1137

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-189 Timing diagram (fault scenario) (1) Activation of function by means of a positive edge (2) Negative acknowledgment: Error occurred (3) Reset functio...

  • Page 1138

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-190 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.22 FC 17: YDelta star/delta changeover Description of Functions The block for star/delta changeover controls the timing of the defined switching logic...

  • Page 1139

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-191 More information about motor speed adjustment can be found in: References: /FB/Description of Functions, Basic Machine; Spindles (S1); Section: Configurabl...

  • Page 1140

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-192 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration of the function STL representation VAR_INPUT YDelta: BOOL ; //Star = 0, delta = 1 SpindleIFNo: INT ; //Machine axis number TimeVal: S5TI...

  • Page 1141

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-193 2.12.23 FC 18: SpinCtrl spindle control Description of Functions FC SpinCtrl can be used to control spindles and axes from the PLC. References: /FB1/Desc...

  • Page 1142

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-194 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Please note: FC 18 must be called cyclically until signal "InPos" or, in the case of an error "Error", produces an edge transitio...

  • Page 1143

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-195 Pos: Position FRate: Positioning speed, if FRate = 0, value from MD35300: SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO (position control activation speed) is used InPos: Is set to ...

  • Page 1144

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-196 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE = 0 Function MD35010: GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE = 1 Function n M42 Pos = 3 Oscillation Pos = 3 Oscillation with gear stage ch...

  • Page 1145

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-197 AxisNo: Number of machine axis Pos: Position FRate: Positioning speed; if FRate = 0, the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO (unit as set in mach...

  • Page 1146

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-198 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 FUNCTION FC 18: VOID //SpinCtrl VAR_INPUT Start: BOOL ; Stop: BOOL ; Funct: BYTE ; Mode: BYTE ; AxisNo: INT ; Pos: REAL; FRate: REAL; END_VAR VAR_OU...

  • Page 1147

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-199 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks FRate I Real ∓ 0,1469368 I -38 to ∓ 0,1701412 I +39 Rotary axis and spindle: rev/min See under table containing in...

  • Page 1148

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-200 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Timing diagram (fault scenario) (1) Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop (2) Negative acknowledgment: Error ha...

  • Page 1149

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-201 2. Start spindle rotation: CALL FC 18 ( Start := M100.0, Stop := FALSE, Funct := Bq16q2, //Rotate spindle Mode := Bq16q5, //Rotational direction as f...

  • Page 1150

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-202 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5. Position axes CALL FC 18 ( Start := M100.0, Stop := FALSE, //Not used Funct := B#16#5, //Position axes Mode := B#16#1, //Position incrementally A...

  • Page 1151

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-203 – When the MCS is selected, the signals are transferred to the interface of the selected machine axis. – When the WCS is selected, the signals are tran...

  • Page 1152

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-204 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 For FC 19, the maximum possible number of axis selections can also be restricted. This limit is set for the appropriate MCP in DB10.DBW30 (symbolic name: M...

  • Page 1153

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-205 MCP selection signals to the user interface Key switch Source: MCP switch Destination: Interface DB Position 0 DB10.DBX56.4 Position 1 DB10.DBX56.5 Posit...

  • Page 1154

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-206 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Direction keys rapid traverse override The transfer is dependent upon the selected axis. The associated interface bits are deleted for axes, which are not ...

  • Page 1155

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-207 Feedrate, spindle signals Source: MCP button Destination: FC output parameters Feed stop Feed enable Parameter: "FeedHold" latched, LEDs are dri...

  • Page 1156

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-208 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Direction key LEDs are controlled by operating the direction keys. Axis selection and WCS/MCS LEDs are controlled by operating the relevant pushbu...

  • Page 1157

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-209 u i 5.2; //Selection of ninth axis = e 4.2; //Selection of fourth axis call fc 19( BAGNo := b#16#1, ChanNo := b#16#1, SpindleIFNo := b#16#4, FeedH...

  • Page 1158

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-210 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks 2: Synchronized actions from channel 3: Read data 4: Write data 5: Control signals to channel 6, 7: Control signals to ...

  • Page 1159

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-211 // Deactivate synchronized actions with ID3, ID10 and ID31 in NC channel 1 : SYAK: OPEN DB 21 SET; S DBX300.2; //ID3 S DBX301.1; //ID10 S DBX303.6; /...

  • Page 1160

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-212 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The semaphore byte is identified by a value between 0 and 1023 in IVAR2. The PLC reads and describes the semaphore byte via FC 21 in the same call, which ...

  • Page 1161

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-213 Variable value ranges The following signals are relevant: Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks Enable I Bool = FC 21 active Funct I Byte 3 ,4 3: Read da...

  • Page 1162

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-214 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call example 1. Read double word of position offset 4 with semaphore in byte 0 and store in MD 100: Data type Dword (4 bytes) Position offset 4 CALL FC ...

  • Page 1163

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-215 CALL FC 21 ( Enable := M 10.0, // if True, FC 21 is active Funct := B#16#3, //Read data S7Var := P#M 104.0 WORD 1, IVAR1 := 8, IVAR2 := -1, Err...

  • Page 1164

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-216 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 7: Update control signals to axes: The purpose of function 7 is to transmit important control signals at high speed in between cyclic data transfers. Data ...

  • Page 1165

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-217 DATA_BLOCK DB 74 STRUCT P: ARRAY[1 to 9] of DINT w1: WORD ; AnzMag: BYTE ; res:BYTE; MagNo: array [1 to 16] of struct //Byte 40 AnzPlatz:INT; res1...

  • Page 1166

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-218 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Explanation of the formal parameters The table below shows all formal parameters of the "TM_DIR" function. Signal I/O Type Value range Remarks M...

  • Page 1167

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-219 2.12.27 FC 24: MCP_IFM2 Transmission of MCP signals to interface Description of Functions With FC MCP_IFM2 (M variant slim operator panel), the following a...

  • Page 1168

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-220 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Feedrate and spindle Start/Stop are not transferred to the interface, but output modally as a "FeedHold" or "SpindleHold" signal. The u...

  • Page 1169

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-221 The axis numbers and the limit can also be adapted dynamically. Afterwards, a new axis must be selected on FC 19. Axis numbers may not be switched over whi...

  • Page 1170

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-222 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call example CALL FC 24 ( //Slim machine control panel M variants //signals to interface BAGNo := B#16#1, //Mode group no. 1 ChanNo := B#16#1, //Channe...

  • Page 1171

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-223 • Machine functions for INC and axis travel keys: – When the MCS is selected, the signals are transferred to the interface of the selected machine axis...

  • Page 1172

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-224 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 To afford this flexibility, tables for axis numbers are stored in DB 10. The table starts from byte 8 (symbolic name: MCP1AxisTbl[1..22]) for the first mac...

  • Page 1173

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-225 Call example CALL FC 25 ( //Machine control panel T variants //signals to interface BAGNo := B#16#1, //Mode group no. 1 ChanNo := B#16#1, //Channel no...

  • Page 1174

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-226 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Feed override: – The feed override is transferred to the interface of the selected channel and to the interface of the axes. – The feed override si...

  • Page 1175

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-227 To afford this flexibility, tables for axis numbers are stored in DB 10. The table starts from byte 8 (symbolic name: MCP1AxisTbl[1..22]) for the first mac...

  • Page 1176

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-228 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.29.2 MCP selection signals to the user interface Operating modes and machine functions Source: MCP key Destination: Interface DB (parameter ModeGrou...

  • Page 1177

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-229 Source: MCP button Destination: Interface DB (Parameter ChanNo) Rapid traverse override DB21, ... DBX20.5 Source: MCP button Destination: Interface DB (6...

  • Page 1178

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-230 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.29.3 Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Operating modes and machine functions Operating modes and machine functions Desti...

  • Page 1179

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-231 Resources used None. General Blocks FC 19 (M version), FC 24 (slim-line version), FC 25 (T version) and FC 26 (HPU/HT6 version) transfer the machine contro...

  • Page 1180

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-232 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The output network transfers the output signals of the machine control panel from the VAR_TEMP image to the logical address. The data for the next cy...

  • Page 1181

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-233 Note The spindle-specific M functions below are not decoded: M3, M4, M5, and M70. Addresses in DB21, ... Variable Type Comment DBX 194.0 ... 7 M...

  • Page 1182

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-234 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.13.3 G Functions General The G functions programmed in the part program, ASUB or synchronized actions are channel specifically transferred from the...

  • Page 1183

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-235 Addresses in DB21, ... Variable Type Initial setting Comment DBB 227 G_FKT_GR_20 Byte 0 Active G function of group 20 DBB 228 G_FKT_GR_21 Byte 0 Acti...

  • Page 1184

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-236 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 G functions (values) A full list of all G functions can be found in: References: /PG/Programming Guide, Basics 2.13.4 Message signals in DB 2 General...

  • Page 1185

    Detailed description 2.13 Signal/data descriptions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-237 User areas in DB 2 Area Address Message number Axis/spindle 1 DBX144.0 - DBX145.7 600.100 - 600.115 Axis/spindle 2 DBX146.0 - DBX147.7 600.200 - 60...

  • Page 1186

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-238 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Area Address Message number User area 12 DBX276.0 - DBX283.7 710.200 - 701.263 User area 13 DBX284.0 - DBX291.7 710.300 - 701.363 User ...

  • Page 1187

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-239 Code Comment //AR1, AR2, DB, DI loaded beforehand L 42; //Transfer 84 bytes M001: L DBW [AR1,P#0.0]; //Copy word-oriented L DB...

  • Page 1188

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-240 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 FUNCTION FC 99: VOID Comment type : BYTE ; END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE = //POINTER L P##Addr; LAR1 ; //Retrieve pointer L...

  • Page 1189

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-241 FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 99 Comment END_VAR VAR_TEMP dbchr : WORD ; Number: WORD ; type : BYTE ; END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE = ...

  • Page 1190

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-242 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 100 Comment CODE_VERSION1 //To deactivate multi-instance DB with STEP 7 Version 2 and higher VAR_INPUT WhichAny : IN...

  • Page 1191

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-243 FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 100 Comment END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE = L P##Temp_addr; LAR1 ; //Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L B#16#10; //AN...

  • Page 1192

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-244 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 99 Comment VAR_INPUT varin: INT ; END_VAR VAR variable1: ARRAY[0 to 9] of INT; variable2: INT ; END...

  • Page 1193

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-245 String parameters are generally assigned to blocks of the basic program by means of a POINTER or ANY. Such assignments must generally b...

  • Page 1194

    Detailed description 2.14 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 2-246 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1195

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 1196

    Supplementary conditions PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1197

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 1198

    Examples PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1199

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10100 PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT Cyclic PLC monitoring time 14504 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT Number of user data (INT) 1...

  • Page 1200

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1201

    PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A Assignment of DBs, 2-64 ASUBs, 2-44 B Basic PLC Program (P3)|Physical interfaces on 840D, 2-22 Basic PLC program (P3)|PLC interface on SINUMERIK 840D, 2-22 Bus addresses on SINUMERIK 840D, 2-...

  • Page 1202

    Index PLC basic program powerline (P3 pl) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PLC/MMC, 2-32 M M decoding acc. to list, 2-47 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_FLOAT, 5-1 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_HEX, 5-1 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT, 5-1 MD14504, 2-51 MD14506, 2-51 MD14508, 2-51 MD35400, 2-189 memory re...

  • Page 1203

    1209,Brief description 1209, 1209, 1209,1 1211,Detailed description 1211, 1211,2 1437,Supplementary conditions 1437, 1437, 1437,3 1439,Examples 1439, 1439, 1439,4 1441,Data lists 1441, 1441,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual 03/200...

  • Page 1204

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1205

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 1209,1-1 2 Detailed descri...

  • Page 1206

    Table of contents PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9.3 Assignment: DB ....................................................................................................................... 1271,2-61 2.9.4 Assignment: Timers .......

  • Page 1207

    Table of contents PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 5 Data lists................................................................................................................................................. 1441,5-1 5.1 Machine dat...

  • Page 1208

  • Page 1209

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1General The PLC basic program organizes the exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and the NCK (Numerical Control Kernel), HMI (Human Machine Interface) and MCP ...

  • Page 1210

    Brief description PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Event-driven signal exchange PLC → NCK An "eventdriven signal exchange PLC → NCK" takes place whenever the PLC passes a request to the NCK (e.g., traversal of an au...

  • Page 1211

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di The tables below show the performance range of the PLC CPUs and the range of the PLC basic program for various control types. Typ...

  • Page 1212

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Type of control 840Di sl 840D sl Notice! The inputs/outputs above 4096 are reserved for integrated drives. Inputs/outputs 1) (add...

  • Page 1213

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Note Number of PROFIBUS slaves Der Inhalt des SDB 2000 und zugehöriger weiterer SDBs wird durch das PLC Betriebssystem in interne...

  • Page 1214

    Detailed description 2.1 Key PLC CPU data for 810D, 840D and 840Di PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Module code PLC module Suitable PLC operating systems (corresponding SIMATIC MLFB) Operating system SW version ID 2000 PLC 317-2DP...

  • Page 1215

    Detailed description 2.2 Reserve resources (timers, counters, FC, FB, DB, I/O) PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Mode selector on PLC CPUs for 840D On the NCU component, the right-hand twist button labeled "PLC" is used to...

  • Page 1216

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs General procedure The hardware configuration for the PLC CPUs used in the N...

  • Page 1217

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Note On SINUMERIK 840D, SIMATIC line 0 is allocated for the SINUMERIK components. The following components are inserted in th...

  • Page 1218

    Detailed description 2.3 Starting up hardware configuration of PLC CPUs PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-2 DP slave properties In the Properties dialog box for the integrated SINAMICS drive, object codes 1 to 6 are used...

  • Page 1219

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 2.4 Starting up the PLC program 2.4.1 Installing the basic program for 840D A complete general reset of the NCK and the PLC is necessary before ...

  • Page 1220

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Comment The catalog structures of a project and the procedure for creating projects and user programs are described in the relevant SIMATIC docu...

  • Page 1221

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.4.4 Machine program The machine manufacturer creates the machine program using the library routines supplied with the basic program. The mach...

  • Page 1222

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 It does not replace the SIMATIC project backup as the series archive saves binary data only, and does not back up, e.g., symbolic information. I...

  • Page 1223

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 0: Normal series start-up file with general reset Bit 0 = 1: Series startup file without general reset. When project contains SDBs, this opti...

  • Page 1224

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The For Each...Next Block programmed above can be programmed in the Delphi programming language as follows (the programming for C, C++ programmi...

  • Page 1225

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 General reset A description of how to perform a general PLC reset appears in the Installation and Start-Up Guide. However, a general reset does ...

  • Page 1226

    Detailed description 2.4 Starting up the PLC program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.9 Troubleshooting This section describes problems which may occur, their causes and remedies and should be read carefully before hardware i...

  • Page 1227

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 840D 2.5.1 General General The AS 300 family is used as the PLC for all systems. On the 840 D, the PLC CPU is integrated in...

  • Page 1228

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Exchange with the operator panel front Data exchange with the operator panel (HMI, OP) usually takes place via the internal software-based C bus. A...

  • Page 1229

    Detailed description 2.5 Linking PLC CPUs to 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 NCK/PLC interface As illustrated in the figure, NCK/PLC data exchange is organized by the basic program in the PLC. At the beginning of the cycle (...

  • Page 1230

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Interface MCP/PLC (Profibus link) MCP/PLC data exchange takes place via the PLC's Profibus. The MCP's I/O addresses must be set in the PLC's process ima...

  • Page 1231

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 2.6.1 PLC/NCK interface General The PLC/NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other. The data interface c...

  • Page 1232

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-4 PLC/NCK user interface

  • Page 1233

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Compile-cycle signals In addition to the standard signals exchanged between the PLC and NCK, an interface data block for compile cycles is also generate...

  • Page 1234

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NCK/PLC signals The group of signals from the NCK to PLC includes: • Actual values of the digital and analog I/O signals of the NCK • Ready and stat...

  • Page 1235

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Figure 2-6 PLC/Mode group interface Signals PLC/NCK channels The signal groups below must be considered on the interface: • Control/status signals...

  • Page 1236

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The triggering and parameter assignment of NCK functions is performed by means of PLC function calls. The following function calls are available, for e...

  • Page 1237

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 PLC/axis, spindle, drive signals The axis-specific and spindle-specific signals are divided into the following groups: • Shared axis/spindle signals ...

  • Page 1238

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.2 Interface PLC/HMI General The following groups of functions are required for the PLC/HMI interface: • Control signals • Machine operation • ...

  • Page 1239

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 An FC (FC 10) for message acquisition is prepared in conjunction with the basic program. This FC records events, subdivides them into signal groups and ...

  • Page 1240

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Step 7 A tool can be started in the Simatic Manager via menu item Target system > CPU messages. Alarms and messages can be displayed by number using ...

  • Page 1241

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 2.6.3 PLC/MCP/HHU interface General There are three different connection options for the machine control panel (MCP) and the handheld unit (HHU). This i...

  • Page 1242

    Detailed description 2.6 Interface structure PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-10 Connection of the machine control panel on 840D 840Di topology On the 840 Di, the machine control panel and handheld unit are connected to ...

  • Page 1243

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 The reverse applies to the associated status signals, which are routed to the MCP interface. For this purpose, FC 19 or the oth...

  • Page 1244

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-12 Structure of the basic program

  • Page 1245

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 2.7.1 Startup and synchronization of NCK PLC Loading the basic program The basic program must be loaded with the S7 tool when t...

  • Page 1246

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Control/Status signals A shared feature of the control and status signals is that they are bit fields. The basic program update...

  • Page 1247

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 M decoder M functions can be used to transfer both switching commands and fixed point values. Decoded dynamic signals are outpu...

  • Page 1248

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.4 Process-interrupt processing (OB 40) General A process interrupt OB 40 (interrupt) can, for example, be triggered by appr...

  • Page 1249

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Auxiliary-function modification signals: Auxiliary-function modification signals are also reset. Auxiliary-function values: Aux...

  • Page 1250

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The following note will later help you to check and diagnose a function call (FCs, FBs of basic program). These are FCs ...

  • Page 1251

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 ASUBs Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs) can be used to activate any function in the NCK. Before an asynchronous subprogram can b...

  • Page 1252

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.8 Symbolic programming of user program with interface DB General Note The basic program library on the CD supplied wit...

  • Page 1253

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 UDT assignments UDT number Assignment to interface DB Meaning UDT 72 DB 72 Tool management: Change in spindle UDT 73 DB 73 Tool...

  • Page 1254

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.9 M decoding acc. to list Description of functions When the M decoding according to list function is activated via the GP p...

  • Page 1255

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Figure 2-14 M decoding acc. to list Activation of the function The number of evaluating/decoding groups is indicated in the ba...

  • Page 1256

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The bit address is generated correspondingly from the first M function ("MFirstAdr") to the last M function ("ML...

  • Page 1257

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 DATA_BLOCK DB 75 TITLE = VERSION: 0.0 STRUCT MSigGrp : ARRAY [1 .. 16 ] OF STRUCT MExtAdr : INT ; MFirstAdr : DINT; MLas...

  • Page 1258

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.10 PLC machine data General The user has the option of storing PLCspecific machine data in the NCK. These machine data can ...

  • Page 1259

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 Note If the number of PLC machine data used is increased later, then DB20 must be deleted beforehand. To prevent such extensio...

  • Page 1260

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 BP parameters (to scan runtime): l gp_par.UDInt; //=4, l gp_par.UDHex; //=2, l gp_par.UDReal; //=1 ) During PLC power-up, D...

  • Page 1261

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 Interrupts Symbol Operand Data type UData DB 20 UDT 20 Access operations in user program (list includes only symbolic read acc...

  • Page 1262

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The components are parameterized by calling basic-program block FB 1 in OB 100. FB 1 stores its parameters in the associated in...

  • Page 1263

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 840D: Ethernet connection Without further configuration settings being made, communication takes place directly from the PLC G...

  • Page 1264

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A fault entry is generated in the alarm buffer of the PLC in the case of timeouts. This causes the following error messages to ...

  • Page 1265

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec BHGStatRec MCP1BusAdr MCP2BusAdr BHGInLen MCP1Timeout MCP2Timeout ...

  • Page 1266

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-18 MPI connection Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCPNum=1 or 2 (number of MCPs) HHU = 1 (MPI) MCP1In MCP2In BHGI...

  • Page 1267

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 An error entry is also made in the PLC diagnostic buffer for timeouts (bits 10 and 27), resulting in the following error messa...

  • Page 1268

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-19 Configuring global data 2.7.12 Switchover of machine control panel, handheld unit Requirements Only Ethernet vari...

  • Page 1269

    Detailed description 2.7 Structure and functions of the basic program PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 A user program copy routine to copy the signals of the active MCP from the I/O area configured in HW Config to DB77. This enabl...

  • Page 1270

    Detailed description 2.8 SPL for Safety Integrated PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.7.13 Special functions of the machine control panel General Special functions are available for some MCP variants: Switch off MCP flashing On th...

  • Page 1271

    Detailed description 2.9 Assignment overview PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 2.9.2 Assignment: FB/FC Number Meaning FB 15 Basic program FB 1, FC2, FC 3, FC5 Basic program FC 0-29 Reserved for Siemens FB 0-29 Reserved for Siemens...

  • Page 1272

    Detailed description 2.9 Assignment overview PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Overview of data blocks DB no. Name Name Package 19 HMI interface 20 PLC machine data 21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 ... n Interface NC channels BP BP 31 - 61 AX...

  • Page 1273

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 840D General The basic program consists of basic and optional functions...

  • Page 1274

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Basic program options Handheld unit FC 13 Display control HHU Can be loaded for handheld units 144 Error/operating mes...

  • Page 1275

    Detailed description 2.10 Memory requirements of basic PLC program for 840D PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 Basic program options DB71 Loading locations Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 40+30*B DB 72 Spindles Generated b...

  • Page 1276

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector 2.11.1 Supplementary conditions 2.11.1.1 Programming and parameterizing tools Hardware P...

  • Page 1277

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 • Testing and diagnostics (ONLINE) – Variable status/forcing (I/Os, flags, data block contents, etc.) – Status of individual b...

  • Page 1278

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.1.2 SIMATIC documentation required References: SIMATIC S 7 System Overview S7-300 Operation List Programming with STEP7 STEP7 U...

  • Page 1279

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 Note The latest NC VAR selector can be used for each NC software version (even earlier versions). The variables can also be selecte...

  • Page 1280

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The list of selected variables is also stored as an ASCII file (file extension .var). The variable list supplied with the "NC V...

  • Page 1281

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 Figure 2-21 Application of NC VAR selector in the STEP 7 environment The NC VAR selector is used to generate a list of selected var...

  • Page 1282

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-22 Basic display with basic menu Project menu item All operator actions associated with the project file (file of selected...

  • Page 1283

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 Opening an existing project Select "Open" under the "Project" menu item to open an existing project (variables a...

  • Page 1284

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Edit menu item The following operator actions are examples of those, which can be carried out directly with this menu item: • Tran...

  • Page 1285

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 The field variables (e.g. axis area, T area data, etc.) are indicated by means of brackets ([.]). Additional information must be spe...

  • Page 1286

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Alias name The variable names provided can be up to 32 characters in length. To make variables clearly identifiable in the data bloc...

  • Page 1287

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 Figure 2-28 Entry field for line, column and block no. Delete variables Variables are deleted in the window of selected variables b...

  • Page 1288

    Detailed description 2.11 General conditions and NC-VAR_Selector PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-29 Window for project path and name of file to be stored Code generation This menu item contains three selection options: ...

  • Page 1289

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 In a STEP7 project The generated AWL file is transferred to a selectable SIMATIC project (program path) and compiled. Furthermore, the symbol can also b...

  • Page 1290

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The integrated PLC only supports cold starts. A warm restart is not provided, i.e., following system initialization, the operating system runs organizat...

  • Page 1291

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 Code Comment MCP2BusAdr: INT ; MCP2Timeout: S5TIME:= S5T#700MS; MCP2Cycl: S5TIME:= S5T#200MS; MCPMPI: BOOL:= FALSE; MCP1Stop: BOOL:= FALSE; M...

  • Page 1292

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Code Comment MaxAxis: INT ; ActivChan: ARRAY[1..10] OF BOOL; ActivAxis: ARRAY[1..31] OF BOOL; UDInt: INT; UDHex: INT; UDReal: INT; END...

  • Page 1293

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks signals only MCPSDB210 I Bool 0: No SDB 210 for MCP 1: Activate timeout monitors on SDB 210 for MCP MCPCopyDB77 I ...

  • Page 1294

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks BHGSendGBZNo I Int HHU default: 1 Transmit GI no. BHGSendObjNo I Int HHU default: 1 Object number for transmit GI B...

  • Page 1295

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Q MaxChan Q INT 1..10 Number of channels MaxAxis ...

  • Page 1296

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 In addition, an error entry is generated in the diagnostics buffer of the PLC, resulting in the following error messages on the HMI: • 400260: MCP 1 ...

  • Page 1297

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 2.12.2 FB 2: Read GET NC variable Description of functions The PLC user program can read variables from the NCK area using FB GET. The FB is multi-insta...

  • Page 1298

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NCK variables within one group can be combined in a job: Area Group 1 C[1] N B Q T Group 2 C[2] N B ...

  • Page 1299

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 Line5 : WORD ; Addr6 : ANY ; Unit6 : BYTE ; Column6 : WORD ; Line6 : WORD ; Addr7 : ANY ; Unit7 : BYTE ; Column7 : WORD ; Line7 : WORD...

  • Page 1300

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks addressing Column1 to Column8 I Word Column address, optional for variable addressing Line1 to Line8 I Word Line ...

  • Page 1301

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L 0 7 Option not set BP parameter "NCKomm" is not set 1 to 8 8 Incorrect target area (RD) RD1 to RD8 may no...

  • Page 1302

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call example Reading of three channelspecific machine data from channel 1, whose address specifications are stored in DB120. Select data with NC VAR se...

  • Page 1303

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 Error := M102.0, NDR := M100.1, State := MW104, RD1 := P#DB99.DBX0.0 BYTE 1, RD2 := P#DB99.DBX1.0 BYTE 1, RD3 := P#M110.0 INT 1); Example: Variabl...

  • Page 1304

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Data types The data types of the NCK are listed in the NCVAR selector with the variables. The tables below give the assignments to the S7 data types. C...

  • Page 1305

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 Variable addressing For some NC variables, it is necessary to select area no. and/or line or column in the NC VAR selector. A basic type can be selected...

  • Page 1306

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 3 VAR_INPUT Req : BOOL ; NumVar : INT ; Addr1 : ANY ; Unit1 : BYTE ; Column1 : WORD ; Line1 : WORD ; Addr2 : ANY ;...

  • Page 1307

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 VAR_OUTPUT Error : BOOL ; Done : BOOL ; State : WORD ; END_VAR VAR_IN_OUT SD1 : ANY ; SD2 : ANY ; SD3 : ANY ; SD4 : ANY ; SD5 : ANY ; SD6 : ANY...

  • Page 1308

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Q SD1 to SD8 I/O Any P#Mm.n BYTE x... P#DBnr.dbxm.n BYTE xData to be written Error identifiers If it...

  • Page 1309

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function (2) Positive acknowledgment: variables have been written (3) Reset function activation after receipt of a...

  • Page 1310

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 U I 7.6; //Manual error acknowledgment U M 102.0; //Error pending R M 100.0; //Terminate job Call fb 3, db 111( Req := M 100.0, NumVar := 3, //...

  • Page 1311

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 Addr2 := "NCVAR".C1_RP_rpa0_0, Line3 := W#16#2 Error := M 11.0, Done := M 11.1, State := MW 12, SD1 := P#M 4.0 REAL 1, SD2 := P#M 24.0...

  • Page 1312

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 4 VAR_INPUT Req : BOOL ; PIService : ANY ; Unit : INT ; Addr1 : ANY ; Addr2 : ANY ; Addr3 : ANY ; Addr4 : ANY ; ...

  • Page 1313

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Q Done Q Bool Job successfully executed State ...

  • Page 1314

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function (2) Positive acknowledgment: PI service has been executed (3) Reset function activation after receipt of...

  • Page 1315

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 PI service Function Available in 840D MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services x TMCRTO Create tool x TMFDPL Empty location search for loading x TM...

  • Page 1316

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.ASUP Assign interrupt Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD 1 to 8 Interrupt num...

  • Page 1317

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.CONFIG Reconfiguration Unit INT 1 WVar1 INT 1 Classification PI service: DIGIO...

  • Page 1318

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.FINDBL Block search Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel WVar1 WORD x Preprocessing mode x: ...

  • Page 1319

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 PI service: NCRES Initiate NC Reset Function: Initiates an NCK Reset. The Unit and WVar1 parameters must be assigned 0. Parameterization: Signal Type ...

  • Page 1320

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PI service: SETUFR Activate user frames Function: User frames are loaded to the NCK. All necessary frame values must be transferred to the NCK beforeha...

  • Page 1321

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 PI service: CREACE Create cutting edge Function: Creation of the cutting edge with the next higher/next unassigned D number for the tool with the trans...

  • Page 1322

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.DELETE Delete cutting edge Unit INT TOA WVar1 INT T number of tool for which t...

  • Page 1323

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 Note On completion of the operation (reading data of this PI service) it is essential that the semaphore is enabled again. Parameter: WVar1=Function...

  • Page 1324

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Before and after this PI service, the MMCSEM PI service must be called up with the associated parameter WVar1 for this PI service. See PI servic...

  • Page 1325

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-115 Loading: If source is an internal loading magazine, then the command parameters are located at the target (a real magazine). Unloading: Source is alw...

  • Page 1326

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-116 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The TMMVTL PI service is used for all movements. 1. Loading and unloading (loading point ↔ magazine) 2. Loading and unloading (loading point ↔ buff...

  • Page 1327

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-117 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning PIService ANY PI.TMMVTL Make magazine location ready for loading, unload tool Unit INT 1, 2 TOA W...

  • Page 1328

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-118 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning Addr1 STRING max. 32 characters Tool identifier WVar1 INT T number WVar2 INT Duplo number WVar3...

  • Page 1329

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-119 PI service: TRESMO Reset monitoring values This PI service resets the monitoring values of the designated edges of the designated tools to their setpoi...

  • Page 1330

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-120 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 define an OR operation for the search criteria, it must first execute a series of queries with AND criteria and then combine/evaluate the results of th...

  • Page 1331

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-121 For a symmetrical search (see parameter "SearchDirection"), the search domain must only include one magazine (cases 2 and 5 in the table abov...

  • Page 1332

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-122 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning edge specifically) 2: Browse all cutting edges to find all tool with this property 3: Browse all t...

  • Page 1333

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-123 _WST, //Addr2:=STR.PName_WST, //Workpiece-program selection Error := M1.0, Done := M1.1, State := MW2); 2.12.5 FB 5: GETGUD read GUD variable...

  • Page 1334

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-124 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 5 //Server name KNOW_HOW_PROTECT VERSION : 3.0 VAR_INPUT Req : bool; Addr: any; //Variables name string Area: b...

  • Page 1335

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-125 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks 2: Channel variables Unit I Byte NCK area: Unit:=1 Channel area: Channel no. Index1 I Int Field index 1 of vari...

  • Page 1336

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-126 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L executable 0 4 Data areas or data types do not tally Check data to be read in RD 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repea...

  • Page 1337

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-127 Call example Reading of a GUD variable with the name "GUDVAR1" as an integer variable (see also table in FB 2: Assignment of NC data type in ...

  • Page 1338

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-128 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 U M 102.0; //Error pending R M 100.0; //Terminate job Call fb 5, db 111( Req := M 100.0, //Starting edge for reading Addr := GUDVAR.GUDVar1, Are...

  • Page 1339

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-129 Declaration FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 7 Var_INPUT Req : BOOL ; PIService : ANY ; Unit : INT ; Addr1 : ANY ; Addr2 : ANY ; Addr3 : ANY ; Addr4 : ANY ; ...

  • Page 1340

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-130 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Unit I Int 1... Area number Addr1 to Addr4 I Any [DBName].[VarName] Reference to strings specification according ...

  • Page 1341

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-131 MagazineNumber _From LocationNumber_From MagazineNumber_To LocationNumber_To Search area WVar1 WVar2 WVar3 WVar4 #M1 #P1 #M1 #P1 Only location #P1...

  • Page 1342

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-132 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Parameter assignment Signal Type Value range Meaning WVar3 INT MagazineNumber_To: Magazine number of magazine at which search must end WVar4 INT Loca...

  • Page 1343

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-133 Tabulated overview of functions: Basic function Meaning Forced break HMI must break connection with an NCU Operating focus changeover to server mode Ch...

  • Page 1344

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-134 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Approvals When one MCP is switched over to another, any active feed or axis enables will be retained. Note Keys actuated at the moment of switchover ...

  • Page 1345

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-135 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the M:N function. Formal parameters of M:N function Signal Type Type R...

  • Page 1346

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-136 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The block must be called by the user program. The user must provide an instance DB with any number for this purpose. The call is not multiinstan...

  • Page 1347

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-137 MCP1Cycl := S5T#200MS, MCP1Stop := TRUE, // MCP switched off NCCyclTimeout := S5T#200MS, NCRunupTimeout := S5T#50S); Example of override switcho...

  • Page 1348

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-138 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 JC smth2; //No, jump S M100.3; //Yes, set auxiliary flag 2 // When override values match, call the MCP program again MCP: CALL "MCP_IFM"( //F...

  • Page 1349

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-139 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 10 VAR_INPUT In1 : BOOL := True ; //Input 1 In2 : BOOL := True ; //Input 2 In3 : BOOL := True ; ...

  • Page 1350

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-140 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The following table shows all formal parameters of the SI relay function. Formal parameters of SI relay function Sign...

  • Page 1351

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-141 In errorfree operation, the brake can produce the necessary braking torque/braking force and keep the axis at a virtual standstill. When an error occur...

  • Page 1352

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-142 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 11 VAR_INPUT Start : BOOL ; //Start of brake test Ack : BOOL ; //Acknowledge error Bclosed : BOOL ...

  • Page 1353

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-143 Formal parameters of brake test function Signal Type Type Remarks MoveAxis Q BOOL Request to initiate travel movement ...

  • Page 1354

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-144 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example of FB11 call: UN M 111.1; //Request to close brake, Z axis of FB = Q 85.0; //Brake control, Z axis OPEN &quo...

  • Page 1355

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-145 OPEN "Axis3"; //Brake test, Z axis O M 111.3; //Test successfully completed O M 111.4; //Error has occurred FP M 110.3; R DBX 28.7; //Reque...

  • Page 1356

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-146 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Data trigger The data trigger function is intended to allow triggering on specific values (or bits) at any permissible memory cell. The cell to be trig...

  • Page 1357

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-147 Structure for ring buffer TITLE = //Ring buffer DB for FB 29 VERSION : 1.0 STRUCT Field: ARRAY [0 .. 249 ] OF STRUCT //can be any size of this stru...

  • Page 1358

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-148 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Parameters for function 2 DataAdr I Pointer Pointer to word to be tested TestVal I Word Comparison value AndMask...

  • Page 1359

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-149 2.12.11 FC 2: GP_HP Basic program, cyclic section Description of functions The complete processing of the NCKPLC interface is carried out in cyclic mod...

  • Page 1360

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-150 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB2 //to interface Ack := I6.1); //Acknowledgment of error messages via I 6.1 END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK 2.12.12 FC 3: GP_PRAL Basic program, interrupt...

  • Page 1361

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-151 Functions which are not assigned via interrupts are only made available by the cyclic basic program as in earlier versions. The change signals of these...

  • Page 1362

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-152 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 //Assigned to basic program GP_IRFromNCK : BOOL ; //Interrupt by NCK for user GP_TM : BOOL ; //Tool management GP_InPosition : ARRAY[1..3] OF BOOL; //A...

  • Page 1363

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-153 ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 82 VAR_TEMP OB82_EV_CLASS : BYTE ; OB82_FLT_ID : BYTE ; OB82_PRIORITY : BYTE ; OB82_OB_NUMBR : BYTE ; OB82_RESERVE...

  • Page 1364

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-154 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 86 VAR_TEMP OB86_EV_CLASS : BYTE ; OB86_FLT_ID : BYTE ; OB86_PRIORITY : BYTE ; OB86_OB_NUMBR : BYTE ; OB86_RESERVED_1 ...

  • Page 1365

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-155 Warning It is not permissible to abort the transfer (e.g., by an external signal reset). The "Start" parameter must always retain the 1 sig...

  • Page 1366

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-156 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Ready: BOOL ; Error : INT ; END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the TM_REV f...

  • Page 1367

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-157 Call example CALL FC 7 ( //Tool management transfer of block for revolver Start := m 20.5, //Start := "1 " => transfer trigger ChgdRevNo ...

  • Page 1368

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-158 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Block FC TM_TRANS may be started (with "Start" parameter = "TRUE") only if an activation signal for the appropriate interface (DB 7...

  • Page 1369

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-159 Note For further details on tool management (also with regard to PLC) refer to the Description of Functions, Tool Management. In addition, PI service...

  • Page 1370

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-160 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks interface, 2nd channel). NewToolMag I Int 1, 0.. Current magazine number of new tool -1: Tool remains at its loc...

  • Page 1371

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-161 (1) Activation of function (2) Positive acknowledgment: Tool management has been transferred (3) Reset function activation after receipt of acknowl...

  • Page 1372

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-162 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 This status is permissible only in conjunction with preparation for tool change (change into spindle). After this status has been transferred to the to...

  • Page 1373

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-163 This status may be used only in conjunction with revolvers, chaintype magazines and disk magazines for the "Tool change preparation" phase. ...

  • Page 1374

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-164 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.16 FC 9: ASUB startup of asynchronous subprograms Description of functions The FC ASUB can be used to trigger any functions in the NC. Before an A...

  • Page 1375

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-165 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the ASUB function. Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Start I Bool ...

  • Page 1376

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-166 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 (1) Activation of function (2) ASUP active (3) Positive acknowledgment: ASUB ended (4) Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment (...

  • Page 1377

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-167 As an alternative to the procedure described under paragraph 2, the user can influence the disable and stop signals without a message output by applyin...

  • Page 1378

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-168 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call example CALL FC 10 ( //Error and operational messages ToUserIF := TRUE, //Signals from DB 2 are transferred //to interface Ack := I6.1); //Ackn...

  • Page 1379

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-169 Example FUNCTION FC 12: VOID //Event control of auxiliary functions VAR_INPUT Chan: BYTE ; //Parameter is supplied by basic program END_VAR VAR_TEMP ...

  • Page 1380

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-170 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Additional parameters The pointer parameters for the input and output data of the handheld unit must be parameterized in the start OB 100 in FB 1, DB 7...

  • Page 1381

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-171 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the BHGDisp function: Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Row I Byte ...

  • Page 1382

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-172 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Value ranges of data types Data type Representable numerical range REAL (Digits := 2) - 99999.99 to + 99999.99 REAL (Digits := 3) - 9999.999 to + 9999....

  • Page 1383

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-173 Figure 2-31 Star/delta switchover More information about motor speed adjustment can be found in: References: /FB1/Function Manual, Basic Functions; S...

  • Page 1384

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-174 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Restrictions Star/delta changeover on digital main spindle drives initiates a process, which contains closed-loop control sequences. Since the closed-l...

  • Page 1385

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-175 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Q Delta Q Bool Energizing of delta contactor Ref I/O Word Instance for...

  • Page 1386

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-176 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 To be able to control an axis or spindle via the PLC, it must be activated for the PLC. This can, for example, be achieved by calling the FC "Spin...

  • Page 1387

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-177 Warning If several block calls (FC 18) have been programmed for the same axis/spindle in the PLC user program, then the functions concerned must be in...

  • Page 1388

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-178 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 AxisNo: Number of machine axis Pos: Set gear step InPos: Error : With positioning error = "1" State : Error code The oscillation speed is tak...

  • Page 1389

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-179 Mode: Positioning mode 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 AxisNo: Number of machine axis Pos: Indexing position FRate: Positioning speed; if FRate = 0, the value is take...

  • Page 1390

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-180 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Start: Initiation signal for start rotation Stop: Initiation signal for stop rotation Funct: "B#16#0A = Rotate spindle with constant cutting rate ...

  • Page 1391

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-181 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks 9: Rotate spindle with gear stage selection A: Rotate spindle with constant cutting rate (m/min) B: Rotate spindle...

  • Page 1392

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-182 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Error identifiers If a function could not be executed, this is indicated by the "Error" status parameter being set to 'logic 1'. The error ca...

  • Page 1393

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-183 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop (2) Positive acknowledgment: Function executed/Posit...

  • Page 1394

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-184 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Call examples 1. Position spindle: //Positive acknowledgment resets Start: U M112.0; //InPos R M 100.0; //Start //Negative acknowledgment, after error...

  • Page 1395

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-185 AxisNo := 5, Pos := 0.0, FRate := MD108, InPos := M112.0, Error := M113.0, State := MB114); 4. Traverse indexing axis CALL FC 18 ( Start := M...

  • Page 1396

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-186 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 In the basic program (FC 2) handwheel selections, modes and other operating signals are transferred from the operator panel front (HMI) to the NCK/PLC ...

  • Page 1397

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-187 The INC selections are transferred to the mode group interface. The activation for this command is performed by this block once after powerup via DB10....

  • Page 1398

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-188 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 19: void //NAME : MCP_IFM VAR_INPUT BAGNo : BYTE ; ChanNo: BYTE ; SpindleIFNo: BYTE ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT F...

  • Page 1399

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-189 MCP selection signals to the user interface Keylock switch Source: MCP switch Destination: Interface DB Position 0 DB10.DBX56.4 Position 1 DB10.DBX56...

  • Page 1400

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-190 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Source: MCP button Destination: Interface DB (all axis DBs) Direction key + DB31, ... DBX4.7 Direction key - DB31, ... DBX4.6 Rapid traverse override D...

  • Page 1401

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-191 Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Operating modes and machine functions Destination: MCP LED Source: Interface DB (parame...

  • Page 1402

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-192 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 FeedHold := m22.0, //Feed stop signal //modal SpindleHold := db2.dbx151.0); //Spindle stop modal in //message DB With these parameter settings, t...

  • Page 1403

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-193 2.12.23 FC 21: transfer PLC NCK data exchange Description of functions When the Transfer block is called, data are exchanged between the PLC and NCK ac...

  • Page 1404

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-194 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks ErrCode Q Int Depends on "Funct" Functions 1: Signals for synchronized...

  • Page 1405

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-195 S DBX300.2; //ID3 S DBX301.1; //ID10 S DBX303.6; //ID31 L B#16#1; T MB11; SPA TRAN; // Synchronized actions from NCK channel: SYVK: L B#16#2;...

  • Page 1406

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-196 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 different for reading and writing variables. Only individual variables or arrays can be supported directly by the semaphore technique. Structure trans...

  • Page 1407

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-197 Variable value ranges The following signals are relevant: Signal Type Type Value range Remarks Enable I Bool = FC 21 active Funct I Byte 3 ,4 3: Re...

  • Page 1408

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-198 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks 24: Cannot write data 25: Local data parameterized for S7Var Call example 1. Read double word of position offset ...

  • Page 1409

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-199 2. Read word of position offset 8 without semaphore and store in MW 104: CALL FC 21 ( Enable := M 10.0, // if True, FC 21 is active Funct := B#16#3...

  • Page 1410

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-200 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Signal Type Type Value range Remarks IVAR1 I Int 0 Error Q Bool ErrCode Q Int 1: ...

  • Page 1411

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-201 2.12.24 FC 22: TM_DIR Direction selection for tool management Description of functions The block TM_DIR provides the shortest path for positioning a ma...

  • Page 1412

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-202 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Offset: BYTE ; Start: BOOL ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Cw: BOOL ; Ccw: BOOL ; InPos: BOOL ; Diff: INT ; Error : BOOL ; END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTIO...

  • Page 1413

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-203 Call example CALL FC 22 ( //Tool management direction selection MagNo := 2, //Magazine number ReqPos := mw 20, //Target position ActPos := mw 22, ...

  • Page 1414

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-204 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Feed override: – The feed override is transferred to the interface of the selected channel and to the interface of the axes. – The feed overrid...

  • Page 1415

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-205 The INC selections are transferred to the mode group interface. The activation for this command is performed by this block once after booting via DB10....

  • Page 1416

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-206 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description of formal parameters The table below shows all formal parameters of the "MCP_IFM2" function: Signal Type Type Value range Remark...

  • Page 1417

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-207 2.12.26 FC 25: MCP_IFT transfer of MCP/OP signals to interface Description of functions With FC MCP_IFT (T variants), the following are transferred fro...

  • Page 1418

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-208 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Multiple calls of FC 25 are permitted in a single PLC cycle. In this case, the first call in the cycle activates the LED displays. Furthermore, all act...

  • Page 1419

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-209 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 25: void // NAME: MCP_IFT VAR_INPUT BAGNo : BYTE ; ChanNo: BYTE ; SpindleIFNo: BYTE ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT...

  • Page 1420

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-210 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.27 FC 26: HPU_MCP Transfer of HPU/HT6 signals to the interface Description of functions With FC HPU_MCP (machine control panel signals of the hand...

  • Page 1421

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-211 Multiple calls of FC 19, FC24, FC 25, and even FC 26 are permitted within the same PLC cycle. In this case, the first call in the cycle activates the L...

  • Page 1422

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-212 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 26: void // NAME: HPU_MCP VAR_INPUT BAGNo : BYTE ; ChanNo: BYTE ; END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Descriptio...

  • Page 1423

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-213 Source: MCP button Destination: Interface DB (Parameter ChanNo) Direction key + DB21, ... DBX12.7 Direction key - DB21, ... DBX12.6 Rapid traverse over...

  • Page 1424

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-214 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.27.2 Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Operating modes and machine functions Operating modes and machine functions D...

  • Page 1425

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-215 General Blocks FC 19 (M version), FC 24 (slim-line version), FC 25 (T version) and FC 26 (HPU/HT6 version) transfer the machine control panel to and fr...

  • Page 1426

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-216 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Axis selection extension The Global_IN network must be modified if more than nine axes are selected. If other keys and LEDs are to be used on the machi...

  • Page 1427

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-217 Note The spindle-specific M functions below are not decoded: M3, M4, M5, and M70. Addresses in DB21, ... Variable Type Comment DBX 194.0 ... 7 M_Fk...

  • Page 1428

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-218 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 POWER ON After POWER ON, the value zero, i.e., active G groups undefined, is specified in the NC/PLC interface for all G groups. Part program end or ab...

  • Page 1429

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-219 Addresses in DB21, ... Variable Type Basic position Comment DBB 239 G_FKT_GR_32 Byte 0 Active G function of group 32 DBB 240 G_FKT_GR_33 Byte 0 Active ...

  • Page 1430

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-220 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Area Address Message number Channel 3 DBX36.0 - DBX47.7 530.000 - 530.231 Channel 3, geo axes DBX48.0 - DBX53.7 531.000 - 531.315 Channel 4 DBX54.0 -...

  • Page 1431

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-221 User areas in DB 2 Area Address Message number User area 0 DBX180.0 - DBX187.7 700.000 - 700.063 User area 1 DBX188.0 - DBX195.7 700.100 - 700.163 U...

  • Page 1432

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-222 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.12.30 Useful Tips on Programming with STEP 7 2.12.30.1 General General Some useful tips on programming complex machining sequences in STEP7 are given...

  • Page 1433

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-223 Multi-instance DBs should be activated only when they are actually going to be used since they increase the runtime and code size of the FBs. Note F...

  • Page 1434

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) 2-224 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Strings General The STRING data type is required by certain services of the basic program. For this reason, some additional facts about the string stru...

  • Page 1435

    Detailed description 2.12 Block descriptions PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-225 FUNCTION FC 99: VOID Comment TITLE = L P##Addr; LAR1 ; //Retrieve pointer from Addr L D [AR1,P#2.0]; //Offset part of pointer of variable LAR1 ; END...

  • Page 1436

  • Page 1437

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 3There are no supplementary conditions to note.

  • Page 1438

  • Page 1439

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 4No examples are available.

  • Page 1440

  • Page 1441

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10100 PLC_CYCLIC_TIMEOUT Cyclic PLC monitoring time 14504 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT Number of user data (I...

  • Page 1442

  • Page 1443

    PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A AS, 2-17 Assignment of DBs, 2-61 ASUBs, 2-41 B BAG, 2-36 Basic PLC Program (P3)|Physical interfaces on 840D, 2-17 Basic PLC program (P3)|PLC interface on SINUMERIK 840D, 2-17 C Concurrent...

  • Page 1444

    Index PLC basic program solution line (P3 sl) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MAXNUM_USER_DATA_INT, 5-1 MD14504, 2-48 MD14506, 2-48 MD14508, 2-48 MD35400, 2-178 memory requirements of basic PLC program, 2-63 Maximum, 2-65 Minimum, 2-65 Message signals in DB2, 2-219 ...

  • Page 1445

    1449,Brief Description 1449, 1449,1 1451,Detailed description 1451, 1451,2 1497,Supplementary conditions 1497, 1497, 1497,3 1499,Data lists 1499, 1499,4SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Valid f...

  • Page 1446

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1447

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 1449,1-1 2 Detailed description .......

  • Page 1448

    Table of contents Reference point approach (R1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4.2 Signals........................................................................................................................................ 1501,4-3 4.2.1 Signals to BAG................

  • Page 1449

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Function The "Reference Point Approach" function is used to synchronize the measuring system of a machine axis with machine zero. The machine axis is traversed to machine zero and ...

  • Page 1450

    Brief Description Reference point approach (R1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Start The reference point approach of a machine axis can be started manually or via the part program: • Manual: Operation mode JOG and MDA, machine function REF • Part program: Part pr...

  • Page 1451

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Axisspecific referencing In axis-specific reference point approach, reference point approach must be initiated individually for each machine axis that is to be referenced. Selection o...

  • Page 1452

    Detailed description 2.1 Axisspecific referencing Reference point approach (R1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Jog mode The following machine data element can be used to specify whether reference point approach is completed when the direction key is pressed once or whe...

  • Page 1453

    Detailed description 2.2 Channelspecific referencing Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Terminating reference point approach Acknowledgment that reference point approach of a machine axis has been successfully completed is given by setting the...

  • Page 1454

    Detailed description 2.2 Channelspecific referencing Reference point approach (R1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Meaning -1 The machine axis does not have to be referenced for NC START in the channel. 0 The machine axis does not participate in channel-specific ...

  • Page 1455

    Detailed description 2.3 Reference point appraoch from part program (G74) Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 DB11, ... DBX0.7 (mode group reset) DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel reset) All machine axes for which the reference point approach is not ...

  • Page 1456

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Reset response Mode group reset or channel reset aborts the reference point approach for all programmed machine axes: DB11, ... DBX0.7...

  • Page 1457

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Figure 2-1 Time sequence when referencing with incremental measuring systems (example)

  • Page 1458

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.2 Phase 1: Traversing to the reference cam Phase 1: Graphic representation Figure 2-2 Phase 1: Traversing to the reference cam Ph...

  • Page 1459

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Case 1: The machine axis is positioned before the reference cam After the start of reference point approach, the machine axis is accel...

  • Page 1460

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Case 3: The machine axis has no reference cam Machine axes without reference point cams remain at their starting position. These incl...

  • Page 1461

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.4.3 Phase 2: Synchronization with the zero mark Phase 2: Graphic representation Figure 2-4 Phase 2: Synchronization with the zero ...

  • Page 1462

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Phase 2: Sequence Synchronization in Phase 2 can occur in two ways: • Synchronization with falling reference cam signal edge • Sy...

  • Page 1463

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Figure 2-5 Synchronization with falling reference cam signal edge Case 2: Synchronization with rising reference cam edge During syn...

  • Page 1464

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-6 Synchronization with rising reference cam signal edge Electronic reference cam offset Electronic reference cam offset is ...

  • Page 1465

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Figure 2-7 Electronic reference cam offset Reference cam adjustment Encoder with equidistant zero marks Always ensure that the refer...

  • Page 1466

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The indicated value is equivalent to the distance between departure from the reference cam and detection of the reference mark. If th...

  • Page 1467

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 2.4.4 Phase 3: Traversing to the reference point Phase 3: Graphic representation Figure 2-8 Phase 3: Traversing to the reference po...

  • Page 1468

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The path sref to be covered is calculated from the sum of the reference point distance plus reference point offset: MD34080 $MA_REFP_...

  • Page 1469

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Special feature of phase 3 If the parameterized distance from the encoder zero mark to the reference point, i.e. the sum of reference...

  • Page 1470

    Detailed description 2.4 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Reference point approach (R1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Warning During the time in which the measuring system (encoder) of the machine axis is switched off ((POWER OFF, "Parking"...

  • Page 1471

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Functional sequence Two different cases apply for automatic referencing, which depend on the encoder status: • Case 1: Encoder status...

  • Page 1472

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.2 Basic parameter assignment Linear measuring systems. The following data must be set to parameterize linear measuring systems: •...

  • Page 1473

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 4. Measure the current position of the machine axis with reference to the machine zero point. 5. Calculate absolute offset and enter in...

  • Page 1474

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-12 Distancecoded reference marks 2.5.4 Phase 1: Travel across the reference marks with synchronization Phase 1: Start For inf...

  • Page 1475

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Once the parameterized number of reference marks has been crossed, the machine axis is stopped again and the actual value system of the...

  • Page 1476

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Features of phase 1 After phase 1 is successfully completed, the actual value system of the machine axis is synchronized. 2.5.5 Phase 2...

  • Page 1477

    Detailed description 2.5 Referencing with distancecoded reference marks Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Features of phase 2 Phase 2 will display different characteristics, depending on whether a reference point cam is parameterized for the...

  • Page 1478

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The reference point position is mapped onto the assigned (ghost) modulo range even with axis function "Determination of reference ...

  • Page 1479

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Readjustment Readjustment of the absolute encoder is required after: • Gear change between load and absolute encoder • Removal/installati...

  • Page 1480

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.2 Calibration by entering a reference point offset Function During adjustment by entering the reference point offset, the difference betw...

  • Page 1481

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Note Backlash compensation If backlash compensation is parameterized for a measuring system with absolute value encoder, the following must...

  • Page 1482

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note The machine axis can only be traversed in the direction enabled for referencing with the travel keys: MD34010 $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MIN...

  • Page 1483

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 2.6.4 Automatic calibration with probe Function In automatic adjustment with a probe, a known position in the machine is approached with the ...

  • Page 1484

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Sequence Proceed as follows for automatic adjustment with probe: 1. Enable part program start even for non-referenced machine axes: MD20700 $...

  • Page 1485

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Procedure Proceed as follows for adjustment with BERO: 1. Set referencing mode to "Referencing with BERO": MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MOD...

  • Page 1486

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.6 Reference point approach with absolute encoders Traversing movement release If for a mchine axis with adjusted absolute value encoder a...

  • Page 1487

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 Avoiding readjustments In some special cases, for example, when a machine axis (built-on rotary axes) is removed and then mounted again, read...

  • Page 1488

    Detailed description 2.6 Referencing with absolute value encoders Reference point approach (R1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 When the measuring system is activated, the NC synchronizes the actual value system of the machine axis with the current absolute value. Trav...

  • Page 1489

    Detailed description 2.7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Note The position control switching speed relevant for spindles is set according to the encoder limiting frequency of the absolute va...

  • Page 1490

    Detailed description 2.7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment Reference point approach (R1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation The activation of the actual value adjustment to the referencing measuring system is machine-specifically carried out via:...

  • Page 1491

    Detailed description 2.7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 2.7.3 Actual value adjustment for measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks Function In order to improve positioning preci...

  • Page 1492

    Detailed description 2.8 Referencing in followup mode Reference point approach (R1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3. Traverse the machine axis across the parameterized number of reference marks. This automatically references the direct measuring system: DB31, ... DBX...

  • Page 1493

    Detailed description 2.8 Referencing in followup mode Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 Zero mark selection when several zero marker signals occur If several encoder zero marks are detected in the traversing range of the machine axis due to ...

  • Page 1494

    Detailed description 2.8 Referencing in followup mode Reference point approach (R1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Sequence of referencing operation (JOG-REF mode) 1. Activate follow-up mode of machine axis: DB31, ... DBX1.4 (follow-up mode) = 0 DB31, ... DBX2.1 (serv...

  • Page 1495

    Detailed description 2.9 Zero mark selection with BERO Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 7. The measuring system is referenced after the encoder zero mark or the assigned number of distance-coded reference marks have been successfully detect...

  • Page 1496

    Detailed description 2.9 Zero mark selection with BERO Reference point approach (R1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Negative edge evaluation In the case of a referencing operation with a negative edge evaluation of the BERO signal: MD34120 $MA_REFP_BERO_LOW_ACTIVE = F...

  • Page 1497

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 Large traverse range Notes on uniqueness of encoder position Linear absolute encoder The absolute value of linear position encoders, e.g., Heidenhain LC181, is always unique for t...

  • Page 1498

    Supplementary conditions 3.1 Large traverse range Reference point approach (R1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Endlessly turning rotary axes with absolute encoders: – Any number of integer transmission ratios are permitted. – We recommend that you parameterize ...

  • Page 1499

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Data lists 44.1 Machine data 4.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 11300 JOG_INC_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD INC/REF in jog/continuous mode 4.1.2 Channelspecific machine data Number Ident...

  • Page 1500

    Data lists 4.1 Machine data Reference point approach (R1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 31123 BERO_DELAY_TIME_MINUS BERO delay time in minus direction 34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE Axis with reference cam 34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Refe...

  • Page 1501

    Data lists 4.2 Signals Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 4.2 Signals 4.2.1 Signals to BAG DB number Byte.Bit Name 11, ... 0.7 Mode group RESET 11, ... 1.2 Machine function REF 4.2.2 Signals from BAG DB number Byte.Bit Name 11, ... 5.2 Acti...

  • Page 1502

    Data lists 4.2 Signals Reference point approach (R1) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4.2.5 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Name 31, ... 1.4 Followup mode (request) 31, ... 1.5 / 1.6 Position measuring system 1 / position measuring system 2 31, ... 2.4 - 2.7 ...

  • Page 1503

    Reference point approach (R1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index D DB11, ... DBX0.1, 2-1, 2-3 DBX0.2, 2-1, 2-3 DBX0.7, 2-3, 2-5, 2-6 DBX1.2, 2-1, 2-3 DB21, ... DBX1.0, 2-4 DBX33.0, 2-4 DBX36.2, 2-2, 2-4 DBX7.7, 2-3, 2-5, 2-6 DB31, ... DBB1.5, 2-37 DBB1.6, 2-37 DBB...

  • Page 1504

    Index Reference point approach (R1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Measuring systems, 1-1 R Referencing methods, 1-1 T Traversing movement release, 2-36

  • Page 1505

    1509,Brief Description 1509, 1509,1 1511,Detailed Description 1511, 1511,2 1589,Constraints 1589, 1589, 1589,3 1591,Examples 1591, 1591, 1591,4 1593,Data lists 1593, 1593,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Spindles (S1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0BP10-1B...

  • Page 1506

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1507

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 1509,1-1 2 Detailed Description........................

  • Page 1508

    Table of contents Spindles (S1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.2.1 Channelspecific setting data ...................................................................................................... 1595,5-3 5.2.2 Axis/spindle-specific setting data .....................

  • Page 1509

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Spindle functions The primary function of a spindle is to set a tool or workpiece in rotary motion in order to facilitate machining. Depending on the type of machine, the spindle must support the following ...

  • Page 1510

    Brief Description Spindles (S1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1511

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed Description 22.1 Spindle modes 2.1.1 General Spindle modes The spindle can have the following modes: • Control mode • Oscillation mode • Positioning mode • Synchronous mode synchronous spindle (S3) • Rigid ...

  • Page 1512

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-1 Switching between spindle modes • Open-loop control mode → Oscillation mode The spindle changes to oscillation mode if a new gear step has been specified using automatic...

  • Page 1513

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 • Positioning mode → Axis mode If a spindle was stopped with orientation, the assigned axis name is used to program a change to axis mode. The gear step is retained. • Open-loop c...

  • Page 1514

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • A spindle position actual-value sensor is an essential requirement for M3/M4/M5 in connection with: – Revolutional feedrate (G95) – Constant cutting rate (G96, G961, G97, G971) ...

  • Page 1515

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 Independent spindle reset Machine data: MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (Independent spindle reset) defines how the spindle behaves after a reset or program end (M2, M30): • MD3...

  • Page 1516

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Spindle behavior with G96, G961 Constant cutting rate • At the start of machining (transition from G0 to Gx) and after NC stop, G60 (exact stop, modal) and G09 (exact stop, non-modal)...

  • Page 1517

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 2.1.3 Spindle oscillation mode Operating principle Oscillation mode is activated for the spindle during the gear step change. A detailed functional description of "spindle mode osc...

  • Page 1518

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SPOS [n]=DC(.....) Spindle positioning across the shortest path to an absolute position (0 to 359.999 degrees). The positioning direction is determined either by the current direction ...

  • Page 1519

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Part programs using M19 as a macro (e.g., DEFINE M19 AS SPOS = 0) or as a subroutine, continue to remain executable. For the sake of compatibility with previous controls, the internal p...

  • Page 1520

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SPOS, M19 and SPOSA have the same functionality, but differ in their block change behavior: • Programming with SPOS and M19 The block change is carried out if all functions programme...

  • Page 1521

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Caution The part programmer must ensure that one of the following maintenance conditions occurs for WAITS. - Position reached - Spindle stationary - Spindle up to programmed speed In...

  • Page 1522

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Special cases • Tolerance for spindle speed: If the machine data setting is: MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL = 0 the NC/PLC IS: DB31...;DBX83.5 (Spindle in setpoint range) is always s...

  • Page 1523

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Feed The positioning speed is configured using machine data: MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO and can be modified by programming or by synchronized actions: FA[Sn] where n = spindle nu...

  • Page 1524

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-2 Positioning from rotation Note The speed from machine data: MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LOW must be greater than the position-control activation speed (MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL...

  • Page 1525

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Possible positioning from Phase 1c: The spindle rotates at the programmed spindle speed, whereby the speed is less than that given in the machine data: MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO ...

  • Page 1526

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Phase 4 Spindle speed > Position-control activation speed The spindle brakes from the calculated "braking point" with machine data: MD35210 $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL to...

  • Page 1527

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Spindle speed < Position-control activation speed (Phase 5, 5a) The spindle is stationary and has reached the end point. Position control is active and holds the spindle in the prog...

  • Page 1528

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-3 Positioning with stationary spindle Phase 1 Case 1: Spindle not synchronized The programming of SPOS, M19 or SPOSA accelerates the spindle with the acceleration from machin...

  • Page 1529

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Exception: If ACN, ACP, IC is used for positioning, the programmed direction of travel is activated. The spindle is synchronized with the next zero mark of the spindle-position actual ...

  • Page 1530

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 To reach the end point, the spindle is accelerated up to the speed defined in machine data: MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO. This is not exceeded. The braking start point calculation ...

  • Page 1531

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Phase 4: The spindle is stationary and has reached the end point. Position control is active and holds the spindle in the programmed position. NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX60.6 (Position re...

  • Page 1532

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.5 Axis mode Why axis mode? For certain machining tasks (e.g., on turning machines with end-face machining), the spindle not only has to be rotated with M3, M4 and M5 and positioned...

  • Page 1533

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Special points to be noted • The feed override switch is active. • NC/PLC IS: DB21, ... DBX7.7 (Reset) does not terminate axis mode as standard. • NC/PLC IS: DBB16 to DBB19 and ...

  • Page 1534

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Other notes on the servo parameter set: References: /FB1/Function Manual, Basic Functions; Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value System, Closed-Loop Control (G2) • When using resolution ...

  • Page 1535

    Detailed Description 2.1 Spindle modes Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Figure 2-4 Validity of parameter sets for axis and spindle modes 2.1.6 Default mode setting Machine data The default setting of the spindle mode allows configuration of the basic spin...

  • Page 1536

    Detailed Description 2.2 Homing/synchronizing Spindles (S1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-5 Programmable defaults for spindle operating mode 2.2 Homing/synchronizing Why synchronize? In order to ensure that the control detects the exact position when it is ...

  • Page 1537

    Detailed Description 2.2 Homing/synchronizing Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Only a homed axis can approach a programmed position accurately on the machine. Further explanations regarding referencing of round axis can be found under: Literature: /FB1/ fu...

  • Page 1538

    Detailed Description 2.2 Homing/synchronizing Spindles (S1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note During synchronization of the spindle, all four possible reference point values and reference point offsets are effective as appropriate to the measurement system selecte...

  • Page 1539

    Detailed Description 2.2 Homing/synchronizing Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Note The overriding of the signal propagation delay by the NC requires the use of type 611D drives. Signal propagation delays are preset on delivery so that the content gener...

  • Page 1540

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Revolutional feedrate (G95) • Constant cutting rate (G96, G961, G97, G971) • Spindle actual speed display • Axis mode • Synchronous spindle setpoint value li...

  • Page 1541

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Selection of gear change type Configuring machine data: MD35010 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE (Gear step change is possible) determines the gear step change type as follow...

  • Page 1542

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-6 Gear step change with selection between two gear steps Parameters on gear step change At gear step change, interpolation parameter and, in the standard case,...

  • Page 1543

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 For further instructions on control and on servo parameter sets see: Literature: /FB1/ functions manual Basic Functions; Speeds, Setpoint-/Actual Value System, Control (...

  • Page 1544

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Second Gear Step Data Record The automatic gear step change M40 will be extended by a second configurable gear step data set. The number of gear steps 1 to 5 used by thi...

  • Page 1545

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 0: The parameter sets cannot be controlled. 1: The servo parameter set is defined primarily by the internal NC switchover at the VDI interface. If the parameter sets c...

  • Page 1546

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 End of gear step change The gear step change is considered completed ("oscillation" spindle mode is deselected) and the spindle is switched to the servo and in...

  • Page 1547

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 If necessary, the speed is limited to the max. speed of the current gear step or increased to the minimum speed of the current gear step, and NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX83....

  • Page 1548

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 If a spindle speed is programmed, which exceeds the max. speed of the defined gear step, the spindle speed is limited to the max. speed of the gear step: MD35130 $MA_GEA...

  • Page 1549

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 These three bits must be set continuously during operation. Successful transfer is acknowledged with NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX82.0-82.2 (Set gear step A to C) to the PLC....

  • Page 1550

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Special points to be noted The following points must be observed on gear step change: • The gear step change is not terminated by selecting NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX20....

  • Page 1551

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 2.3.2 Intermediate gear Application and functions A configured intermediate gear can be used to adapt a variety of rotating tools. The intermediate gear on the tool side...

  • Page 1552

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note At zero speed, switchover is jerk-free. The user is therefore responsible for taking appropriate precautions. Applications in which switchover takes place during ...

  • Page 1553

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 • Enable PI service machine data • Switch over skip block, switch over Dry Run • Editing in the modes • Compensation block alarms • Overstore • Rapid retract...

  • Page 1554

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation speed) The spindle is in oscillation mode if a new gear step was defined using automatic gear step selection (M40) or M41 to M45 (DB31, .....

  • Page 1555

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 The time t1 (or t2) is started, according to which start direction is given in the machine data: MD35430 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR The time - and not the fact that the...

  • Page 1556

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX18.5 (Oscillation speed) should be used to support mechanical engagement of the gear. It has no effect on the internal control mechanism for...

  • Page 1557

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 • NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX18.5 (Oscillation enable) can be set by the PLC. The spindle motor then performs an oscillation motion with preset values. The oscillation...

  • Page 1558

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Oscillation mode Typical time sequence for the gear step change with a spindle: Figure 2-9 Gear step change with stationary spindle

  • Page 1559

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 2.3.5 Gear step change at fixed position Application and advantages Machine tools increasingly use standardized spindle drives, firstly to save technological dead time o...

  • Page 1560

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Position control is not disabled when an active measuring system with indirect encoder (motor encoder) is used: MD31040 $MA_ENC_IS_DIRECT = 0 If a measuring system w...

  • Page 1561

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 Figure 2-10 Gear step change with stationary spindle Gear step change position MD35012 The gear step change position is defined in machine data: MD35012 $MA_GEAR_STEP_C...

  • Page 1562

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Gear step change wait time MD35310 After the positioning action the machine waits for the time configured in machine data: MD35310 $MA_SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME until gear ...

  • Page 1563

    Detailed Description 2.3 Configurable gear adaptation Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 acceleration The acceleration values are determined through the gear step dependent machine data: MD35200 $MA_GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL and MD35210 $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL...

  • Page 1564

    Detailed Description 2.4 Selectable spindles Spindles (S1) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Constraints • The spindle must have at least one measuring system. • Positioncontrolled operation must be possible and must have been activated. • Generally, it must be pos...

  • Page 1565

    Detailed Description 2.4 Selectable spindles Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 The logical spindles can be switched by changing the setting data: SD42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB[...] The change can be achieved by the part program, by the PLC and/or HMI. Not...

  • Page 1566

    Detailed Description 2.4 Selectable spindles Spindles (S1) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation Setting data: SD42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB[...] is enabled by activating machine data: MD20092 $MC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE=1 . Basic position SD42800 After switching ...

  • Page 1567

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 SD42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB[2] = 2 SD42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB[3] = 3 SD42800 $SC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB[4] = 0 Logical spindle not assigned M3 S1000 Address extension = 1, M1=3 S1=1000 i...

  • Page 1568

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Statement Description G97/G971 CancelG96/G961 and freeze last spindle speed G63 Tapping with compensating chuck G33/G34/G35 Thread cutting G331/G332 Rigid tapping G4 S... Dwell time in ...

  • Page 1569

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 Statement Description M[n]=19 the spindle with number n to the position entered in setting data: SD43240 $SA_M19_SPOS . The block change is only performed when the spindle is in positio...

  • Page 1570

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Statement Description – CSCALE() • Velocity and acceleration values for following spindles with SPI: – FA[SPI(n)] – ACC[SPI(n)] – OVRA[SPI(n)] • System variable with SPI: –...

  • Page 1571

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 For synchronized actions: • M40 is deactivated after POWER ON. The gear step is not adjusted if an S value is specified from a synchronized action. • An M40 command programmed using ...

  • Page 1572

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Functionality Special VDI interface signals are provided to start and stop spindles outside a running part program. In this regard, the channel status and the program status need not be ...

  • Page 1573

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 Spindle job outside the acceptance range LowHigh edges outside the acceptance range will be ignored. No alarm message is output by the NCK. It can be assumed that the acceptance range wi...

  • Page 1574

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Basic logic functions: Spindle commands: Spindle start clockwise rotation Spindle start counterclockwise rotation Select gear step Spindle positioning VDI interface signals DB31, ... DBB...

  • Page 1575

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 Acknowledgment spindle start/stop A spindle start can be detected at the VDI interface based on traversing commands output: DB31, ... DBX64.6 = 1 (Traversing command minus) or DB31, ... ...

  • Page 1576

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Gear step change and effect on speed In the current version, no gear step change is triggered if the setpoint speed is out of the speed range of the gear step. The usual speed limitation...

  • Page 1577

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 Further explanations regarding metric/inch measuring system can be found under: Literature: /FB1/ Function Manual, Basic Functions; Speeds, Setpoint-/Actual Value System, Control (G2) Se...

  • Page 1578

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 through FC18 and synchronized actions. Bit 5 = 1 The content of setting data: SD43200 $SA_SPIND_S serves as the setpoint speed in JOG mode. You can use the JOG keys to operate the spin...

  • Page 1579

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 Bit 2 = 0 Gear step change for programmed gear step is not performed subsequently on REPOS after deselection of functions DryRun, Program Test and SERUPRO. Bit 2 = 1 Gear step change for...

  • Page 1580

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Further explanations regarding set search execution SERUPRO can be found under: Literature: /FB1/ Function Manual, Basic Functions; Mode group, Channel, Program Mode (K1) Constraints If ...

  • Page 1581

    Detailed Description 2.5 Programming Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 2.5.6 External programming (PLC, HMI) SD43300 and SD42600 The revolutional feedrate behaviour can be selected externally via the axial setting data: SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURC...

  • Page 1582

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6 Spindle monitoring 2.6.1 Speed ranges Permissible speed ranges for the spindle The spindle monitoring functions and the currently active functions (G94, G95, G96, G961, G97, G...

  • Page 1583

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 2.6.2 Axis/spindle stationary (n < n min) Spindle monitoring with stationary axis/spindle Only if the axis/spindle is stationary, i.e., the actual spindle speed falls below a s...

  • Page 1584

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Axial NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX83.5 (Spindle in setpoint range) is set to 0. • The next machining block is not enabled. • Machine data: MD35500 $MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_S...

  • Page 1585

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 2.6.4 Minimum/maximum Speed of gear step Minimum speed The minimum gear step speed is entered in machine data: MD35140 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT . This setpoint speed cannot b...

  • Page 1586

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6.5 Maximum encoder limit frequency Caution The maximum encoder frequency limit of the actual spindle position encoder is monitored by the control (the limit can be exceeded)....

  • Page 1587

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 Maximum encoder limit frequency unudershot If the maximum encoder frequency limit has been exceeded and the speed subsequently falls below the maximum encoder limit frequency (sma...

  • Page 1588

    Detailed Description 2.6 Spindle monitoring Spindles (S1) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-12 Exact stop zones of a spindle DB31, ... DBX60.7 and DB31, ... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse / fine) The two limit values defined by machine data: M...

  • Page 1589

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Constraints 3No supplementary conditions apply.

  • Page 1590

    Constraints Spindles (S1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1591

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 Example of automatic gear step selection (M40) Example To illustrate the contents of the new block search variables: Assumptions about automatic gear step selection (M40): S0...500 1. Gear step S501..1000 2. Ge...

  • Page 1592

    Examples 4.1 Example of automatic gear step selection (M40) Spindles (S1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1593

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10192 GEAR_CHANGE_WAIT_TIME Wait time for acknowledgment of a gear stage change during reorganization 10714 M_NO_FCT_EOP M func...

  • Page 1594

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Spindles (S1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 31044 ENC_IS_DIRECT2 Encoder on intermediate gear 31050 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM Denominator load gearbox 31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA Numerator load gearbox 31064 ...

  • Page 1595

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 35350 SPIND_POSITIONING_DIR Positioning direction of rotation for a nonsynchronized spindle 35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO Oscillation speed 35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACC...

  • Page 1596

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Spindles (S1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $SA_ Description 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 Progr. Spindle speed limitation G26 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS Progr. spindle speed limitation G96/G961 43240 M19_SPOS Spindle position for s...

  • Page 1597

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 DB number Byte.bit Description 31, ... 19.7 - 19.0 Spindle offset H to A 31, ... 30.0 Spindle stop 31, ... 30.1 Spindle start CW 31, ... 30.2 Spindle start CCW 31, ... 30.3 Automatic gear step change...

  • Page 1598

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Spindles (S1) 5-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1599

    Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $AA_S[n], 2-5 $AC_SGEAR, 2-67 $P_GEAR, 2-67 C Constant cutting rate setting, 2-63 D DB 31, ... DBB16-19, 2-21 DBB68ff., 2-58 DBB82-91, 2-21 DBX1.3, 2-73 DBX1.5, 2-27 DBX1.6, 2-27 DBX16.0-16.2, 2-6, 2-31, 2-34, 2-3...

  • Page 1600

    Index Spindles (S1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DBX82.0-82.2, 2-67 DBX82.3, 2-67 DBX83.1, 2-66 DBX83.2, 2-66 DB31... DBX61.4, 2-10 DBX83.5, 2-11 Dry run feedrate (DryRun), 2-66 G Gear step change from NC, 2-29 Gear steps, 2-28 I Intermediate gear, 2-39 Invert M3...

  • Page 1601

    Index Spindles (S1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 S SD41200, 2-65 SD42600, 2-68 SD42800, 2-52, 2-53, 2-54 SD43200, 2-60, 2-61, 2-62, 2-62, 2-63, 2-65 SD43202, 2-62, 2-63 SD43240, 2-8, 2-56 SD43250, 2-8 SD43300, 2-68 Special spindle interface, 2-59 Specify gear step...

  • Page 1602

    Index Spindles (S1) Index-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1603

    1607,Brief Description 1607, 1607,1 1611,Detailed description 1611, 1611,2 1659,Supplementary conditions 1659, 1659, 1659,3 1661,Examples 1661, 1661, 1661,4 1663,Data lists 1663, 1663,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Feeds (V1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0B...

  • Page 1604

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1605

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief Description ..................................................................................................................................... 1607,1-1 2 Detailed description ..........................

  • Page 1606

    Table of contents Feeds (V1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3.2 Signals from channel.................................................................................................................. 1666,5-4 5.3.3 Signals to axis/spindle.................................

  • Page 1607

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief Description 1Types of feedrate The feedrate determines the machining speed (axis or path velocity) and is observed in every type of interpolation, even where allowance is made for tool offsets on the contour or on the tool...

  • Page 1608

    Brief Description Feeds (V1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Feedrate control The programmed feedrate can be modified for adaptation to changes in technological conditions during machining or for test purposes. • Via the machine control panel • Via the operator pa...

  • Page 1609

    Brief Description Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-3 Feedrate for chamfer/rounding FRC, FRCM The machining conditions can change significantly during surface transitions to chamfer/rounding. The chamfer/rounding contour elements therefore need their own optimiz...

  • Page 1610

  • Page 1611

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed description 22.1 Path feedrate F 2.1.1 General Path feedrate F The path feedrate represents the geometrical total of the velocity components in the participating axes. It is therefore generated from the individual motio...

  • Page 1612

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Feedrate for internal radius and external radius path sections For circular blocks or spline blocks with curvature in the same direction and tool radius offset activated (G41/G42), the p...

  • Page 1613

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 2.1.2 Type of feedrate G93, G94, G95 Effectivity The feedrate types G93, G94, G95 are active for the G functions of group 1 (except G0) in the automatic modes. G94 or G95 can be used fo...

  • Page 1614

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Revolutional feedrate (G95) The revolutional feedrate is programmed in the following units relative to a master spindle: • [mm/rev] on standard metric systems • [inch/rev] on standa...

  • Page 1615

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 "Revolutional feedrate active" DB31, ... DBX62.2 A programmed, active revolutional feedrate (G95) is displayed using this interface signal. Alarms • If no F value is programm...

  • Page 1616

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Diameter programming and reference axis for several transverse axes in one channel: One or more transverse axes are permitted and can be activated simultaneously or separately: • Prog...

  • Page 1617

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 Note G96, G961 is only active during workpiece machining (G1, G2, G3, spline interpolation, etc., where feedrate F is active). The response of the spindle speed for active G96, G961 and...

  • Page 1618

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 In the event of incorrect programming that would cause one of the speed limits (G26 or SD43220 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26) to be exceeded, the "Programmed speed too high" interface...

  • Page 1619

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 Master spindle switchover with G96, G961 If the master spindle is switched over when G96, G961 are active, the speed of the former master spindle is retained. This corresponds to a trans...

  • Page 1620

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 At the end of the acceleration ramp, the position coupling between the spindle actual value (spindle setpoint with SPCON on master spindle) and the axis setpoint is established. At this...

  • Page 1621

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 2.1.4.2 Programmable run-in and run-out path for G33, G34 and G35 Application Figure 2-2 Runin or runout path too short • Short run-in path Due to the collar on the thread runin, li...

  • Page 1622

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 SD42010 Only paths, and not positions, are programmed with DITS and DITE. The part program instructions are related to the setting data: SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0,1], , which def...

  • Page 1623

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 Constraints When a block containing command DITS and/ or DITE is loaded in the interpolator, the path programmed in DITS is transferred to setting data: SD42010 $SC_THREAD_RAMP_DISP[0]...

  • Page 1624

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The identifiers have the following meanings: F: The thread-lead change to be programmed [mm/rev2 ke: Thread lead of axis target point coordinate, thread axis [mm/rev] ka: Initial threa...

  • Page 1625

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 Suppress special alarms Any lead changes that would overload the thread axis when G34 is active or would result in an axis standstill when G35 is active are detected in advance during b...

  • Page 1626

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • If the spindle speed is too high when G33, G34, G35 are active, e.g., spindle override set to 200%, alarm 22270 "Spindle speed for thread cutting too high" is output. Alar...

  • Page 1627

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Figure 2-3 Interruption of G33 through retraction motion Retraction path The retraction path can be configured in machine data: MD21200 LIFTFAST_DIST. If required, this path in the pa...

  • Page 1628

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The default setting for NC Reset and/or NC Start is specified in machine data:: MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES. In the plane of the retraction movement, ALF is used, as before, to program ...

  • Page 1629

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 thread cutting ;Retraction path = 10 mm ;Retraction plane Z/X (due to G18) ;Retraction direction -X (with ALF=3; retraction direction +X) N71 G33 Z55 X15 N72 G1 ;Deactivate thread...

  • Page 1630

    Detailed description 2.1 Path feedrate F Feeds (V1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.5 Feedrate for G331/G332, rigid tapping Application G331 (tapping) and G332 (tapping retraction) can be used to tap a thread without a compensating chuck (rigid tapping) if the spin...

  • Page 1631

    Detailed description 2.2 Feedrate FA for positioning axes Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 2.2 Feedrate FA for positioning axes Syntax FA[<positioning axis>] = <feedrate value> Functionality The velocity of a positioning axis is programmed with ax...

  • Page 1632

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note Maximum axis velocity The maximum axis velocity is not exceeded: MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity) F function output to the NC/PLC interface Output of the F funct...

  • Page 1633

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 Figure 2-4 Programming and controlling the feedrate 2.3.2 Feedrate disable and feedrate/spindle stop General The feedrate disable or feedrate/spindle stop brings the axes to a standst...

  • Page 1634

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 "Feedrate disable" DB21, ... DBX6.0 Interface signal "Feedrate disable" (DB21, ... DBX6.0) shuts down all axes (geometry and auxiliary axes) of a channel in all mod...

  • Page 1635

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 Activation of the "Spindle stop" function If G33, G34, G35 active: Effective (may cause contour deviations depending on dynamic characteristics) If G63 active: Effective If ...

  • Page 1636

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The interface for the override can be provided by the PLC in binarycoded or Graycoded format. Machine data: MD12020 OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE (path feedrate override switch Gray-coded) and...

  • Page 1637

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Activation of channel-specific feedrate and rapid traverse override If G33, G34, G35 active: Not effective If G63 active: Not effective If G331, G332 active: Not effective Reference sp...

  • Page 1638

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation of axis-specific feedrate override If G33, G34, G35 active: Not effective If G63 active: Not effective (the override is set to a fixed value of 100% in the NC) If G331, G332...

  • Page 1639

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Activation of spindle override If G63 active: Not effective (the override is set to a fixed value of 100% in the NC) If G331, G332 active: Effective Limiting the override factor On a b...

  • Page 1640

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3.4 Programmable feedrate override Function The programmable feedrate override can be used to change the velocity level of path and positioning axes by means of a command in the part...

  • Page 1641

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 "Dry run feedrate selected" DB21, .... DBX24.6 The dry run feedrate can be activated from the PLC or the operator panel. When activated from the operator panel, interface si...

  • Page 1642

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Effectivity 2 Setting data SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED is effective directly, regardless of the programmed velocity. 3 -9 reserved 10 As for configured value 0 except for thread cutting (G...

  • Page 1643

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 Retraction Retraction by the programmed amount is initiated in the IPO cycle. Signals The HW input signals are combined in one input byte for the function "Multiple feedrate in on...

  • Page 1644

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Hardware assignment The channel-specific machine data: MD21220 MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN (assignment of the input byte of the NCK I/Os for "Multiple feedrates in one block") ca...

  • Page 1645

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Programming path motion The path feedrate is programmed under the address F and remains valid until an input signal is present. This value acts modally. F2=... to F7=... can be used in...

  • Page 1646

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 These addresses apply nonmodally. If feedrates, a sparking out time (dwell) or retraction path are programmed for an axis on account of an external input, this axis must not be progra...

  • Page 1647

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 Figure 2-6 Calipers Part program Note The axial feedrate/path feedrate (F value) is the 100% feedrate. Feedrates smaller than or equal to the axial feedrate/path feedrate can be ...

  • Page 1648

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3.7 Fixed feedrate values (840D, 810D) Function The machine data can be used to define 4 fixed feedrate values, which can be activated via the interface signal. The function is possi...

  • Page 1649

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Interface signals Figure 2-7 Overview of interface signals for fixed feedrate 2.3.8 Feedrate for chamfer/rounding FRC, FRCM General The machining conditions can change significantly d...

  • Page 1650

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Empty blocks When chamfer or rounding is active, the possible number of blocks containing no traversing information is limited. The maximum number is defined in machine data: MD20200 C...

  • Page 1651

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 Constraints • The programmed value of FB=<value> must be greater than zero. • If no traversing motion is programmed in the block (e.g.,: computation block), FB has no effect....

  • Page 1652

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The acceleration value (MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL) Programmable indirectly in the part program by overwriting the machine data with subsequent NewConfig, or directly using a percentage...

  • Page 1653

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 Note Changes in the dynamic response made in a part program do not affect command axis or PLC axis movements. Changes from synchronized actions do not affect the movements from a par...

  • Page 1654

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Main run axes Main run axes (MR axes) are axes that are interpolated by the main run and can be: • Command axes (activated by synchronized actions) • PLC axes (started by PLC via f...

  • Page 1655

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 end-of-motion criterion for single axes Similar to the block change criterion for path interpolation (G601, G602 and G603) it is also possible to program the movement end criterion for...

  • Page 1656

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Programmable servo parameter set SCPARA[Axis] = ... SCPARA[axis]= ... can be used to program the parameter set (consisting of MDs) in the part program and in synchronized actions (prev...

  • Page 1657

    Detailed description 2.3 Feedrate control Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 • In the event of a RESET, the last programmed value remains for the part program specifications. The settings for main-run interpolations do not change. • Block search: The last e...

  • Page 1658

  • Page 1659

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 General boundary conditions Several feeds in one block The "Several feeds in one block" function is only available in conjunction with the: "Synchronized Actions" function. Refer...

  • Page 1660

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 Supplementary conditions for feedrate programming Feeds (V1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Activation of the F values Machine data: MD22140 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (F function active via RESET) can be used to define whether the followi...

  • Page 1661

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 Feedrate programming for chamfer/rounding FRC, FRCM Example 1: Following block feedrate MD20201 CHFRND_MODE_MASK Bit0 = 0 (apply feedrate from following block; default setting) N10 G0 X0 Y0 G17 F100 G94 N20 G1 ...

  • Page 1662

    Examples 4.1 Feedrate programming for chamfer/rounding FRC, FRCM Feeds (V1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min
 (modal) N90 X40 ; Modal rounding N90-N100 
with FRCM=50 mm/min N100 Y40 FRCM=0 ; Modal rounding N...

  • Page 1663

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10704 DRYRUN_MASK Activating the dry run feed 10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB Setting data to be updated 11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK M...

  • Page 1664

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Feeds (V1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.1.2 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20100 DIAMETER_AX_DEF Geometry axes with transverse axis functions 20172 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL Maximum permissible deviation from ...

  • Page 1665

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 5.2 Setting data 5.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE Start angle for thread 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP Runin and runout path of feed axis wi...

  • Page 1666

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Feeds (V1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5.3 Signals 5.3.1 Signals to channel DB number Byte.Bit Description 21, ... 0.6 Activate dry run feed 21, ... 4 Feed override 21, ... 5 Rapid traverse override 21, ... 6.0 Feed disable 21, ... 6.6 Rapid...

  • Page 1667

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-5 5.3.3 Signals to axis/spindle DB number Byte.Bit Description 31, ... 0 Feed/spindle override 31, ... 1.7 Override active 31, ... 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Activate fixed feedrate 1 for machine axis Activate fixed...

  • Page 1668

  • Page 1669

    Feeds (V1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index A Acceleration correction in the part program/synchronized action, 2-42 Axis/spindle disable ?DB31, ... DBX1.3, 2-24 C CFC, 2-2 CFCIN, 2-2 CFTCP, 2-2 Constant cutting rate (G96), 2-5 Constant cutting rate G96, G961, G9...

  • Page 1670

    Index Feeds (V1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 MD12202, 2-37 MD12204, 2-37 MD12240, 3-1 MD20100, 2-6, 2-9 MD20150, 2-16, 2-18, 2-19, 3-1 MD20172, 1-2 MD20200, 2-39 MD20201, 2-39, 4-1 MD20650, 2-12 MD20750, 2-7 MD21200, 2-17 MD21220, 2-33 MD21230, 2-33 MD22140, 3-1...

  • Page 1671

    1677,Short description 1677, 1677,1 1681,Detailed Description 1681, 1681,2 1829,Supplementary conditions 1829, 1829, 1829,3 1831,Examples 1831, 1831, 1831,4 1843,Data lists 1843, 1843,5SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edi...

  • Page 1672

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1673

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Short description..................................................................................................................................... 1677,1-1 2 Detailed Description................

  • Page 1674

    Table of contents Tool compensation (W1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability....................................................................................... 1759,2-79 2.5.1 General...............................................

  • Page 1675

    Table of contents Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 v 5.2 Setting data................................................................................................................................ 1845,5-3 5.2.1 Channelspecific setting data..............

  • Page 1676

    Table of contents Tool compensation (W1) vi Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1677

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Short description 1Calculating tool compensation data The SINUMERIK 840D/810D controls can be used to calculate the following tool compensation data: • Length compensation • Radius compensation • Storage of too...

  • Page 1678

    Short description Tool compensation (W1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 – Collision detection selectable: Possible contour violations are detected predictively, if: - Path is shorter than tool radius - Width of an inside corner is shorter than the tool diameter –...

  • Page 1679

    Short description Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-3 G461/G462 In order to enable the solid machining of inside corners in certain situations with the activation and deactivation of tool radius compensation, commands G461 und G462 have been introduc...

  • Page 1680

    Short description Tool compensation (W1) 1-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1681

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed Description 22.1 Tool 2.1.1 General Select tool A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Whether the new tool will be loaded immediately by means of the T function depends on the setting in the...

  • Page 1682

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The next tool is preselected with the machine data: MD20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE (Preselected tool at RESET). Its tool length compensation values must be considered at RESET and ...

  • Page 1683

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 Selection of the cutting edge when changing tool When a new tool (new T number) has been programmed and the old one replaced, the following options are available for selecting the cutti...

  • Page 1684

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tools The TO memory consists of tools numbered T1 to T32000. Each tool can be set up via TOA files or individually, using the "New tool" soft key. Compensation values not requ...

  • Page 1685

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 2.1.3 Calculating the tool compensation D No. The D no. is sufficient for calculating the tool compensations (can be set via MD). Example: The above compensation block is to be calcu...

  • Page 1686

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Effect on the D number A compensation data set is determined by the D number. The D address cannot be programmed with an address extension. The evaluation of the D address always refers...

  • Page 1687

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 • D4 relates to tool "5" (as when tool management is active) without active tool management and with the machine data: MD20096 $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE. Address e...

  • Page 1688

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Cutting edge number CE When you rename D numbers, the information in the tool catalog detailing the numbers defined for these cutting edges is lost. It is, therefore, impossible to dete...

  • Page 1689

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 • GETDNO Determines the D number for the cutting edge of a tool. If no D number matching the input parameters exists, d=0. If the D number is invalid, a value greater than 32000 is r...

  • Page 1690

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note When the "Flat D numbers" function is active, only one D compensation can be defined in the TO unit. MD18105 $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO = 9999 Tools can be assigned u...

  • Page 1691

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 Programming examples Renaming a D number The D number of cutting edge CE = 3 is to be renamed from 2 to 17. The following specifications apply: • Internal T number T = 1 • D number...

  • Page 1692

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DZERO - Invalidate D numbers The activation of this command invalidates all D numbers of the tools in the TO unit. It is no longer possible to activate a compensation until valid D num...

  • Page 1693

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 It is possible to work with the tool status "to be unloaded" and "to be loaded". CHKDNO ;Loading/unloading and the operation for renaming D numbers are complete. I...

  • Page 1694

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 D compensation data set missing Program execution is interrupted at the block containing the invalid D value (regardless of the value of machine data MD22550). The operator must either...

  • Page 1695

    Detailed Description 2.1 Tool Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 M06 ; Detect bit memory "xx missing" → output alarm, ; stop program ; Correct block with, e.g., Tyy M06, start, ; block Tyy M06 interpreted and OK. ; Machining continues....

  • Page 1696

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DRF handwheel traversal with half distance During DRF handwheel traversal, it is possible to move a transverse axis through only half the distance of the specified i...

  • Page 1697

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 Activation Which type of D number management is valid may be set via the machine data: MD18102 $MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE (type of D number programming). Value = 0...

  • Page 1698

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.2.3 Read D number from the PLC Reading from system variables The programmer has various options for specifying the D number in the part program. One option is to ...

  • Page 1699

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 Address extension of D It is not possible to extend the address of D. Only one active compensation data block is possible for the tool path at a given time. Direct, ...

  • Page 1700

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Indirectly parameterized program D=$A_DNO[n] Meaning: Select the D number entered at position n (=1 to 9) in the VDI D number table. The $A_DNO variable is read duri...

  • Page 1701

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 Before outputting the T number to the PLC, the NCK stores the status of the VDI with reference to the queued D number(s). A counter is contained in the VDI for this ...

  • Page 1702

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tool MDs The following machine data affect the way tools and cutting edges (D numbers) work in the NCK: • MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT (Basic setting of tool c...

  • Page 1703

    Detailed Description 2.2 Flat D number structure Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 T is used as the tool preparation command. The name of the M function for the tool change is defined via the machine data: MD22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE (M function...

  • Page 1704

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 This means that it only makes sense to employ tool management when specific tools have been defined and these are to be utilized by the NCK. Flat D number Flat D number me...

  • Page 1705

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 References: /PG/Programming Manual, Fundamentals; Tool Compensation (W1) / Section "List of Tool Types" /FB3/ Function Manual Special Functions; 3D Tool Radius C...

  • Page 1706

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tool parameter Meaning Note Reserved for expansions 25 Reserved* * "Reserved" means that this tool parameter on the 840D/810D is not used (reserved for expan...

  • Page 1707

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 Figure 2-3 Table of tool types

  • Page 1708

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Special points to be noted • The tool type must be specified for each tool cutting edge. • Only the values specified can be used for the tool type. • Tool type 0 (ze...

  • Page 1709

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 Figure 2-4 Geometry of slotting saw (analogous to angle head cutter) The width of the saw blade is accounted for with G40 to G42: G40 No saw blade compensation G41 Saw b...

  • Page 1710

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-5 Dimensions for turning tools: Turning tool Length of cutting edge The cutting edge position describes the position of the tool tip P in relation to the cutting...

  • Page 1711

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 Figure 2-8 Tool parameter 2 (P2): Cutting edge position for vertical boring and turning mills Special feature • If the cutting edge center point S is used instead of po...

  • Page 1712

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note For information about entering tool dimensions (lengths) in tool parameters 3 to 4 (tool lengths 1 to 3) and how these are calculated in the three geometry axes, p...

  • Page 1713

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 2.3.5 Geometry tool radius compensation (tool parameters 6 to 11) Tool geometry Geometry tool radius compensation defines the shape of the tool. Figure 2-10 Description o...

  • Page 1714

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tool length 1 Not used Tool length 2 Not used The tool radius must be entered for the following tool types in tool parameter 6 (tool radius 1): Tool type 1xx Milling too...

  • Page 1715

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 Active tool size The geometry tool compensation (tool parameters 3 to 5) and the wear tool length compensation (tool parameters 12 to 14) are added together (geometry tool...

  • Page 1716

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-11 Example applications for base-dimension/adapter-dimension TLC Basic length 1 to 3 In order that the discrepancy between the toolholder reference point F and t...

  • Page 1717

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 2.3.9 Technology - tool clearance angle (tool parameter 24) Meaning Certain turning cycles, in which traversing motions with tool clearance are generated, monitor the tool...

  • Page 1718

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note If a tool clearance angle (tool parameter 24) of zero is entered, relief cutting is not monitored in the turning cycles. Please refer to the following documentation...

  • Page 1719

    Detailed Description 2.3 Tool cutting edge Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 Figure 2-14 Retraction behavior for tool with relevant tool point direction 1. In circle blocks and in motion blocks containing rational polynomials with a denominator de...

  • Page 1720

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) 2.4.1 General Note For tool radius compensation (TRC) please refer to: References: /PG/Programming Manu...

  • Page 1721

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 TRC on the plane TRC is active on the current plane (G17 to G19) for the following types of interpolation: • Linear interpolation ... G0,G1 • C...

  • Page 1722

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Tool radius compensation is not selected with a tool cutting edge/tool compensation of D0. • If only one geometry axis is programmed on the pla...

  • Page 1723

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 Figure 2-16 Example for selecting TRC with KONT or NORM in front of and behind the contour • KONT and G450/G451 (corner behavior at outer corners)...

  • Page 1724

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Axes The continuity condition is observed in all three axes. It is thus possible to program a simultaneous path component perpendicular to the compen...

  • Page 1725

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 Figure 2-17 Approach and retraction with constant curvature during inside machining of a full circle. Projection in the X-Y plane.

  • Page 1726

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-18 Approach and retraction with constant curvature during inside machining of a full circle. 3D representation. KONTT and KONTC compared Th...

  • Page 1727

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 Figure 2-19 Differences between KONTT and KONTC Note The figure shows that a straight line bordering on the contour quadrant, e.g., to X20 Y-20, w...

  • Page 1728

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Approach movement A maximum of 4 sub-movements: • Start point of the movement P0 • Intermediate points P1, P2 and P3 • End point P4 Points P0, ...

  • Page 1729

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 • Modal G code for defining the approach and retraction contour This G code is only relevant if the approach contour is a quadrant or semicircle. T...

  • Page 1730

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Modal G code (G340, G341), which defines the subdivision of the movement into individual blocks from the start point to the end point Figure 2-2...

  • Page 1731

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 • DISR: Specifies the length of a straight approach line or the radius of an approach arc. On approach/retraction along a straight line, DISR speci...

  • Page 1732

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Programming the end point P4 (or P0 for retraction) generally with X... Y... Z.... 1. Possible programming of end point P4 for approach: End poi...

  • Page 1733

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 N30/N40 can be replaced by: N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 X40 Y-10 Z0 F1000 or: N30 G41 G147 DISCL=3 DISR=13 F1000 N40 G1 X40 Y-10 Z0 2. Possible...

  • Page 1734

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Velocity of the preceding block (typically G0). All movements from point P0 to point P2 are performed at this velocity, i.e., the movement paral...

  • Page 1735

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Milling tool T1/D1 $TC_DP6 [1,1] = 7 ; Tool with 7 mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL=AC(5) DISR=13...

  • Page 1736

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-23 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on approach with G341 During retraction, the rolls of the modally active feedrate from the previous bloc...

  • Page 1737

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 Figure 2-24 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on retraction System variables Points P3 and P4 can be read in the WCS as system variables during approa...

  • Page 1738

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • At least two blocks must always be taken into consideration: – The SAR block itself – The block, which defines the approach or retraction dir...

  • Page 1739

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 Figure 2-25 Contour example 1 Part program: $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Tool definition T1/D1 $TC_DP6 [1,1] = 10 ; Radius N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z30 N20 G247 G341 G42 ...

  • Page 1740

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The following conditions must be true for retraction: • Smooth retraction is activated in block N60 • Retraction movement performed with quadrant...

  • Page 1741

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 Note The contour generated in this way is modified by tool radius compensation, which is activated in the SAR approach block and deactivated in the ...

  • Page 1742

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-27 Example of a 90 degree outside corner with G450 and G451 G450 transition circle With the G function G450 active, on outside corners, th...

  • Page 1743

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 Figure 2-28 Example: Overshoot with DISC=25 Figure 2-29 Overshoot with DISC depending on contour angle G451 intersection If G function G451 is acti...

  • Page 1744

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The contour angle which can be traversed following this automatic switchover (intersection → transition circle) can be defined in the following mac...

  • Page 1745

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 Figure 2-31 Example of automatic switchover to intersection 2.4.7 Compensation at inside corners Intersection If two consecutive blocks form an insi...

  • Page 1746

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 No intersection In certain cases, no intersection is found between two consecutive blocks for inside corners (see figure below). Predictive contour c...

  • Page 1747

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 Multiple intersections → see also "Collision detection" It can be the case with inside corners that multiple intersections of the equidis...

  • Page 1748

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.4.8 Collision detection and bottleneck detection Collision detection Collision detection (bottleneck detection) examines whether the equidistant pa...

  • Page 1749

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 Warning 10763 If a block has been omitted as a result of the collision or bottleneck detection functions, warning 10763 is output. The program is not...

  • Page 1750

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-36 Tool radius compensation with variable compensation value Calculation of intersection When the intersections in blocks with variable com...

  • Page 1751

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 Maintain stability of closed contour If a radius of two circles is increased slightly, a third block may be necessary in order to maintain the stabil...

  • Page 1752

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 block is inserted between the end point of the previous block, i.e., the last programmed traversing block with active CUTCONON, and this point. Circu...

  • Page 1753

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 Special cases • If tool radius compensation is not active (G40), CUTCONON has no effect. No alarm is produced. The G code remains active, however. ...

  • Page 1754

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • The type of contour suppression is evaluated only in the first traversing block of a sequence of consecutive traversing blocks. If both CUTCONON ...

  • Page 1755

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 2.4.12 Intersection procedure for polynomials Function If two curves with active tool radius compensation form an outside corner, depending on the G ...

  • Page 1756

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-39 Retraction behavior with G460 The last block with active tool radius compensation (N20) is so short that an intersection no longer exis...

  • Page 1757

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 Figure 2-40 Retraction behavior with G461 The control attempts to cut this circle with one of the preceding blocks. If CDOF is active, the search is...

  • Page 1758

    Detailed Description 2.4 Tool: Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Tool compensation (W1) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-41 Retraction behavior with G462 The search for the intersection is then identical to the procedure for G461. With G462, the corner generat...

  • Page 1759

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 Note The approach behavior is symmetrical to the retraction behavior. The approach/retraction behavior is determined by the state of the G command in...

  • Page 1760

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Toolholder selection A toolholder defined in the control must be specified for the "Toolholder with orientation capability" function. The NC...

  • Page 1761

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 Processing toolholder data blocks Two options are available: • Explicit entry in the toolholder data block from the part program • Automatic accep...

  • Page 1762

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tool compensation types TRC takes account of the current tool orientation when CUT2D or CUT3DFS is active. All other tool compensation types These are...

  • Page 1763

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 parameter sets A complete set of parameters for a toolholder with orientation capability consists of 33 values. The following system variables are ava...

  • Page 1764

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Components and presetting of the chain/data block The values $TC_CARR1 to $TC_CARR20 and $TC_CARR24 to $TC_CARR33 in the toolholder data block are of ...

  • Page 1765

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 Description NCK variables Language format Preassignment Axis identifier of the rotary axis v2 $TC_CARR22 AXIS 0 Kinematic type $TC_CARR23 CHAR T Offse...

  • Page 1766

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Description NCK variables Language format Preassignment x comp. fine offset of offset vector l4 $TC_CARR58 REAL 0 y comp. fine offset of offset vector...

  • Page 1767

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 Less than two rotating axes The option not to define a rotating axis makes sense when the toolholder to be described can only rotate the tool in one p...

  • Page 1768

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-43 Kinematic chain to describe a tool with orientation Vectors, which describe offsets in the rotary head, are positive in the direction fro...

  • Page 1769

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 Vectors, which describe offsets in the rotary table, are positive in the direction from the machine reference point to the table. The following kinema...

  • Page 1770

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Note On machines with extended kinematics it is generally useful, as with machines where only the table can be rotated, for the machine reference poi...

  • Page 1771

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 An illegal fine offset value is only detected when: • A toolholder with orientation capability, which contains such a value, is activated and • Se...

  • Page 1772

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-46 Assignment of the toolholder data Suitable assumptions were made for the following values in the data block: • The two rotary axes int...

  • Page 1773

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 Description NCK variables Value z component of rotary axis v1 $TC_CARR9 0 x component of rotary axis v2 $TC_CARR10 -1 y component of rotary axis v2 $T...

  • Page 1774

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.5.3 Oblique machining with 3 + 2 axes Description of function Inclined machining with 3 + 2 axes describes an extension of the concept of toolholder...

  • Page 1775

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 In the current SW version, a data block in the tool compensation memory is described with a total of 47 REAL values. For toolholders that have two rot...

  • Page 1776

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 TCARR frame offset A frame offset as a result of a toolholder change becomes effective immediately on selection of TCARR=.... A change in the tool len...

  • Page 1777

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 Rotary table With rotary tables (kinematic types P and M), activation with TCARR similarly does not lead to an immediate rotation of the coordinate sy...

  • Page 1778

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PAROT and TOROT take into account the overall change in orientation in cases where the table or the tool are oriented with two rotary axes. With mixed...

  • Page 1779

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 3. Accessing the data of a toolholder: – Part program → $TC_CARRn[m] = value This describes the previous value of the system variables n for toolh...

  • Page 1780

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The effect of TCOFR is such that, when machining on an inclined surface, tool compensations are considered implicitly as if the tool were standing v...

  • Page 1781

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 Tool radius compensation with CUT2D or CUT3DFS: The current tool orientation is included in the tool radius compensation if either CUT2D or CUT3DFS i...

  • Page 1782

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Limit values Limit angles (software limits) can be specified for each rotary axis in the system variable set ($TC_CARR30 to $TC_CARR33) used to descr...

  • Page 1783

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 Canceling all toolholder data blocks All values of all toolholder data sets can be deleted from within the part program using one command. $TC_CARR1[...

  • Page 1784

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Non-defined orientation If these conditions are not satisfied and an orientation that cannot be achieved by an active frame is requested with TCOFR, ...

  • Page 1785

    Detailed Description 2.5 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 Toolholder kinematics The following supplementary conditions must be met for toolholder kinematics: • Tool orientation in initial state, both angle...

  • Page 1786

    Detailed Description 2.6 Incrementally programmed compensation values Tool compensation (W1) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.6 Incrementally programmed compensation values 2.6.1 G91 extension Prerequisites Incremental programming with G91 is defined such that the co...

  • Page 1787

    Detailed Description 2.6 Incrementally programmed compensation values Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 Note With this configuration, part programs must always begin with absolute programming. 2.6.2 Machining in direction of tool orientation Ty...

  • Page 1788

    Detailed Description 2.6 Incrementally programmed compensation values Tool compensation (W1) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-48 Definition of the position for absolute programming of a motion in tool direction The reference to this auxiliary plane serves onl...

  • Page 1789

    Detailed Description 2.7 Basic tool orientation Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 2.7 Basic tool orientation Application Normally, the orientation assigned to the tool itself depends exclusively on the active machining plane. For example, the tool...

  • Page 1790

    Detailed Description 2.7 Basic tool orientation Tool compensation (W1) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example: $TC_DPV[1, 1] = 0 $TC_DPV3[1, 1] = 1.0 $TC_DPV4[1, 1] = 0.0 $TC_DPV5[1, 1] = 1.0 In this example, the basic orientation points in the direction of the bise...

  • Page 1791

    Detailed Description 2.7 Basic tool orientation Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 The basic orientation is also rotated when an adapter transformation is active. If the following setting data is not equal to zero, the tool orientation is not rotat...

  • Page 1792

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Supplementary conditions If the "Scratch" function is used in the RESET state, the following must be noted with respect to the initial sett...

  • Page 1793

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 Note In the following description, the wear includes the total values of the following components: • Wear values: $TC_DP12 to $TC_DP20 • Sum off...

  • Page 1794

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Function The following components are mirrored by inverting the sign: • Tool lengths: $TC_DP3, $TC_DP4, $TC_DP5 • Tool base dimensions: $TC_DP21,...

  • Page 1795

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-115 Function Length of cutting edge Length 1 Length 2 1 --- --- 2 --- Inverted 3 Inverted Inverted 4 Inverted --- 5 --- --- 6 --- --- 7 --- Inverted 8 I...

  • Page 1796

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-116 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 tool radius 101 mm N100 T1 D1 G41 X150 Y20 .... N150 G40 X300N10 .... N200 $SC_WEAR_SIGN = 1 ; Sign inversion for all wear values; the new radius...

  • Page 1797

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-117 The following table shows the assignment of tool length components to geometry axes for all other tools (tool types < 400 or > 599): Layer Len...

  • Page 1798

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-118 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Toolholder with orientation capability Setting data SD42900 - SD42950 Setting data SD42900 - SD42950 have no effect on the components of an active to...

  • Page 1799

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-119 When transformation is deactivated, the basic tool is displayed in the x, y or z direction, according to the working plane. Allowance is made for a p...

  • Page 1800

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-120 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 • Transformation type 56 One axis rotates the tool, the other axis rotates the workpiece without temperature compensation In generic 5axis transfor...

  • Page 1801

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-121 The setting data are userdefined, e.g., using synchronized actions or from the PLC. The compensation values can, therefore, also be used for other co...

  • Page 1802

    Detailed Description 2.8 Special handling of tool compensations Tool compensation (W1) 2-122 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 The first rotary axis rotates around Z C axis The second rotary axis rotates around Y B axis The essential machine data are shown in the table below:...

  • Page 1803

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-123 ;Position setpoints of the machine axes N10 g74 x0 y0 z0 a0 b0 ;X Y Z N20 x20 y20 z20 f10000 ;20.30 20.00 21.00 N30 traori() ;20.30 20.00 21.00 N40 x10 y10 z...

  • Page 1804

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) 2-124 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 In contrast, the wear values of a D number describe the physical wear of the cutting edge, i.e., in special situations, the sum offset can match the wear of t...

  • Page 1805

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-125 • Define whether the sum offsets (fine/coarse) are to be saved during data backup • Define the sum offset to be activated, if: – A new cutting edge comp...

  • Page 1806

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) 2-126 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Tool base dimension/adapter dimension $TC_DP21 Adapter length 1 $TC_DP22 Adapter length 2 $TC_DP23 Adapter length 3 Technology System variable Clearance ang...

  • Page 1807

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-127 Tool geometry parameter, to which the compensation is added. Sum/setup parameters, length compensations Tool wear parameters $TC_DP7 Corner radius $TC_DP16 ...

  • Page 1808

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) 2-128 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DL programming The sum offset is always programmed relative to the active D number with the command: DL = "n" The sum offset "n" is added ...

  • Page 1809

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-129 Figure 2-50 MD18112 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4 = 0 Tool T = t is active. With the data in the figure, the following is programmed: D2 ; Cutting edge offs...

  • Page 1810

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) 2-130 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Figure 2-51 MD18112 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4 = 1 "setup offsets" + "sum offsets fine" Tool T = t is active. With the data in the fig...

  • Page 1811

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-131 The above statements also apply to the setup offsets (if the NCK is configured with this option), i.e., R5 = $TC_ECP13[ t, d ] ;Sets the value of the R param...

  • Page 1812

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) 2-132 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DELDL - Delete sum offset Sum offsets are generally only relevant when machining with a cutting edge at a certain time at a certain location of the workpiece....

  • Page 1813

    Detailed Description 2.9 Sum offsets and setup offsets Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-133 Note Sum offsets behave in the same way as D compensations with reference to block search and REPOS. The behavior on Reset and PowerOn can be defined by mach...

  • Page 1814

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-134 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 T5 M06 ; Tool number 5 is loaded - D2 + DL=1 are active (= values of machine data) D1 DL=3 ; Compensation D1 + sum offset 3 of D1 are activated. X10 DL=2 ...

  • Page 1815

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-135 2.10.2 Saving with TOOLENV Scope of a tool environment The TOOLENV memory function is used to save any current states needed for the evaluation of tool data...

  • Page 1816

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-136 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Not in the tool environment The value of the machine data determines whether the adapter length or the tool base dimension is included in the tool length ca...

  • Page 1817

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-137 -3: Null string illegal as name of a tool environment. -4: No parameter (name) specified. _NAME STRING Name, under which the current data set is store...

  • Page 1818

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-138 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.10.4 How many environments and which ones are saved? $P_TOOLENVN This system variable returns the number of available data sets for describing tool enviro...

  • Page 1819

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-139 2.10.5 Read T, D, DL from a tool environment GETTENV function The GETTENV function is used to read the T, D and DL numbers stored in a tool environment. Th...

  • Page 1820

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-140 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.10.6 Read tool lengths, tool length components GETTCOR function The GETTCOR function is used to read out tool lengths or tool length components. The para...

  • Page 1821

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-141 edge Abscissa (LEN[2]) Ordinate (LEN[3]) Applicate (LEN[4]) Tool radius (LEN[5]) The coordinate system defined in _COMP and _STAT is used as the refer...

  • Page 1822

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-142 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 specified. An optional programmable colon must be followed by a single character specifying the coordinate system, in which the tool length components are t...

  • Page 1823

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-143 _D INT Cutting edge of the tool. If this parameter is not specified, or if its value is 0, the D number used is based on the source of the T number. If t...

  • Page 1824

    Detailed Description 2.10 Working with tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 2-144 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Kinematic transformation, toolholder with orientation capability If a toolholder with orientation capability is taken account of during the tool length calc...

  • Page 1825

    Detailed Description 2.11 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-145 GETTCOR examples GETTCOR(_LEN): Calculates the tool length of the currently active tool in the machine coordinate system allowing for all comp...

  • Page 1826

    Detailed Description 2.11 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Tool compensation (W1) 2-146 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Value/parameter: Status INT 0: Function OK, information in _AXIND sufficient for description (all tool length components are parallel to the ...

  • Page 1827

    Detailed Description 2.11 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-147 Further explanations If the tool length components are parallel to the geometry axes, the axis indices assigned to length components L1 to L3 a...

  • Page 1828

    Detailed Description 2.11 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Tool compensation (W1) 2-148 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A change from G17 to G18 or G19 does not alter the result, because the assignment of the length components to the geometry axes changes in the ...

  • Page 1829

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3-1 Supplementary conditions 33.1 Flat D number structure Grinding tools Grinding tools (tool types 400-499) cannot be defined using the simple tool management structure (flat D numbers). Block search T number output to ...

  • Page 1830

    Supplementary conditions 3.2 SD42935 expansions Tool compensation (W1) 3-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3.2 SD42935 expansions SD42935 Which of the wear components are to be transformed and which are not to be transformed in conjunction with the functions TOWMCS and TOWW...

  • Page 1831

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-1 Examples 44.1 Toolholder with orientation capability 4.1.1 Example: Toolholder with orientation capability Requirement The following example uses a toolholder, which is described fully by a rotation about the Y axis....

  • Page 1832

    Examples 4.1 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 4-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4.1.2 Example of toolholder with orientation capability with rotary table Use of the MOV command For use of the MOVT command it is assumed that the program is runn...

  • Page 1833

    Examples 4.1 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-3 N220 $TC_CARR20[1] = 15 ; Z component of 4th offset vector N230 $TC_CARR21[1] = A ; Reference for 1st axis N240 $TC_CARR22[1] = B ; Reference for 2nd axis N250 $...

  • Page 1834

    Examples 4.1 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 4-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N350 thus approaches the position X10 X10 Z0 (= Z-13 + tool length). Note: Through the simultaneous programming of both rotary axes A and B the actual position of ...

  • Page 1835

    Examples 4.1 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-5 4.1.4 Calculation of compensation values on a location-specific and workpiece-specific basis Tool with adapter A tool with adapter and toolholder with orientation ...

  • Page 1836

    Examples 4.1 Toolholder with orientation capability Tool compensation (W1) 4-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N330 $TC_CARR23[1] = "T" ; Tool mode N340 Stopre N350 $SC_WEAR_TRANSFORM = 'B101' N360 T0 D0 DL=0 N370 ROT X30 N380 G90 G1 G17 F10000 X0 Y0 Z0 N390 ...

  • Page 1837

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-7 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Example 3: N10 def real _CORVAL[3] N20 $TC_DP1[1,1] = 120 ; Milling tool N30 $TC_DP3[1,1] ...

  • Page 1838

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 4-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 _CORCOMP is 3, as in the previous example, but the compensation is now effective on the geometry axis with index 0 (X axis). The tool components L3 a...

  • Page 1839

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-9 Figure 4-1 Tool length compensation, example 6 If the sample program is continued after N110 with the following instructions: N120 _CORVAL[0] = 0.0...

  • Page 1840

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 4-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 N72 _CORVAL[2] = 0.0 N80 rot y 30 N90 t1 d1 g18 g0 N100 r1 = settcor(_CORVAL, "GW", 1, 3, 1) N110 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 ; ==> MCS positio...

  • Page 1841

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 4-11 In N90 the setting data is enabled: SD42930 $SC_WEAR_SIGN (sign of wear). i.e. the wear must be valued with a negative sign. The compensation is vec...

  • Page 1842

    Examples 4.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Tool compensation (W1) 4-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Example 9: 2 (tool length must be valued in the diameter axis with the factor 0.5) is the value of machine data: MD20360 $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK...

  • Page 1843

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-1 Data lists 55.1 Machine data 5.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL Number of tools that the NCK can manage (SRAM) 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER Number of toolholders 18094 ...

  • Page 1844

    Data lists 5.1 Machine data Tool compensation (W1) 5-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE Definition of the preselected tool, for which the tool length compensation is selected during powerup and on reset or pa...

  • Page 1845

    Data lists 5.2 Setting data Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 5-3 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 21080 CUTCOM_PARALLEL_ORI_LIMIT Limit angle between path tangent and tool orientation with 3D tool radius compensation 22530 TOCARR_CHANGE_M_CODE M cod...

  • Page 1846

    Data lists 5.3 Signals Tool compensation (W1) 5-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42935 WEAR_TRANSFORM Transformation of wear values 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Retain the assignment of tool length components when changing the machining plane...

  • Page 1847

    Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index $ $A_DNO[n], 2-17 $A_MONIFACT, 3-1 $P_TOOLENV, 2-133 $P_TOOLENVN, 2-132 $TC_DPCE[t,d], 2-8 A Alarm for preprocessing stop, 2-71 Assignment tool/toolholder, 2-76 B Basic orientation of tools, 2-105 Basic too...

  • Page 1848

    Index Tool compensation (W1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Limited toolholder orientation, 2-78 M Machine kinematics, 2-79 Machine with rotary tool, 2-83 Machine with rotary workpiece, 2-84 Machines with extended kinematics, 2-85 Machining in direction of tool ori...

  • Page 1849

    Index Tool compensation (W1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 T T function, 2-1 Taking the compensation values into account location-specifically and workpiecespecifically, 4-5 TCARR, 2-91 TCOABS, 2-91 TCOFR, 2-91 TOA, 2-3 Tool, 2-1 Change, 2-1 Change tool with M06, 2...

  • Page 1850

    Index Tool compensation (W1) Index-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1851

    1855,Brief description 1855, 1855, 1855,1 1857,Detailed Description 1857, 1857,2SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl/840D/840Di/810D NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual 03/2006 Edition 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl SINUMERIK 840Di sl/840DiE sl S ...

  • Page 1852

    Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damag...

  • Page 1853

    NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 iii Table of contents 1 Brief description...................................................................................................................................... 1855,1-1 2 Detailed Description........

  • Page 1854

    Table of contents NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) iv Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11.1 Signals to NC (DB10)............................................................................................................... 1954,2-98 2.11.2 Signals from NC (DB10)...............

  • Page 1855

    NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 1-1 Brief description 1The section entitled "NC/PLC interface signals" includes a detailed description of NC/PLC interface signals relevant to function: • PLC messages (DB2) • NC (DB10) • Mode grou...

  • Page 1856

    Brief description NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 1-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1857

    NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-1 Detailed Description 22.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) 2.1.1 Signals from PLC to NC (DB10) DB10 DBX56.4 - DBX56.7 Key-operated switch positions 0 to 3 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: c...

  • Page 1858

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.1.2 Selection/Status signals from HMI to PLC (DB10) DB10 DBX103.0 HMI-Alarm is active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Cyclic S...

  • Page 1859

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-3 2.1.3 Signals from the NC to the PLC (DB10) DB10 DBX104.7 NCK-CPU-Ready Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or ...

  • Page 1860

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB10 DBX108.6 611D-Ready Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 All existing drives signal t...

  • Page 1861

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-5 DB10 DBX109.0 NCK alarm is active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 No NCK alarm is active. Corresponding to .... DB21, ... DBX36.6 (...

  • Page 1862

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB10 DBX109.7 NCK battery alarm Refer to References for effects and measure. • The battery voltage is below the pre-warning limit range...

  • Page 1863

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-7 DB19 DBX0.1 Darken screen If a key is not pressed on the keyboard for a time that is defined using machine data: MD9006 $MM_DISPLAY_BLACK...

  • Page 1864

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX0.4 Clear recall alarms Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Clear error key on th...

  • Page 1865

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-9 DB19 DBX7.0 - DBX7.7 Analog spindle 2, utilization in percent Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic DB19 DBX8.0 - DBX8.7 Cha...

  • Page 1866

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX12.2 COM2 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 COM2 active Signal state 0 or edge...

  • Page 1867

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-11 DB19 DBX12.6 RS-232-C off Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 RS-232-C off active Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 RS-232-C off i...

  • Page 1868

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX13.7 Selection Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Selection active Signal state...

  • Page 1869

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-13 DB19 DBX16.0 - DBX16.6 PLC index for the user control file Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Description This byte for cont...

  • Page 1870

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX45.1 FC9 Out: Done Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic DB19 DBX45.2 FC9 Out: Error Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) u...

  • Page 1871

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-15 DB19 DBX20.4 Recall alarm cleared Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Recall alarm delet...

  • Page 1872

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX24.0 Error (status RS-232-C from PLC) Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Error...

  • Page 1873

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-17 DB19 DBX24.4 RS-232-C stop (status RS-232-C from PLC) Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 ...

  • Page 1874

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX24.7 RS232C on (status RS232C from PLC) example(s) Corresponding to .... Applies to HMI Embedded DB19 DBX25.0 - DBX25.7 Erro...

  • Page 1875

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-19 DB19 DBX26.3 Active (job list selection from PLC, status) Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0...

  • Page 1876

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB19 DBX27.0 - DBX27.7 Data transfer error • 2 = DB19.DBB17 could not be read • 3 = control file /BD.DIR/PLC_IN_OUT_xxx.TEA not foun...

  • Page 1877

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-21 DB21, ... DBX6.2 Delete distancetogo (channelspecific) The rising edge of the interface signal is only effective for the axes involved ...

  • Page 1878

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-22 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX36.7 NCK alarm with processing stop present Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 ...

  • Page 1879

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-23 DB31, ... DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable edge change 0 → 1 - Axis disable - Spindle disable If the interface signal "Axis disable&qu...

  • Page 1880

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-24 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable Notes: This signal inhibits setpoint output to the drive. A brief pulse can bring a traversing axi...

  • Page 1881

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-25 DB31, ... DBX1.4 Follow-up mode Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 Followup mode is selected for the axis/spi...

  • Page 1882

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-26 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - DBX1.6 Position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / Position measuring system 2 (PMS2) Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated...

  • Page 1883

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-27 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - DBX1.6 Position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / Position measuring system 2 (PMS2) DB31, ... DBX60.4 and 60.5 (reference...

  • Page 1884

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-28 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX2.1 Controller enable is set to 1. When "controller enable" has been signaled no new actual value synchronization...

  • Page 1885

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-29 DB31, ... DBX2.1 Controller enable maintained. Controller enable is automatically cancelled by the control when certain faults occur at ...

  • Page 1886

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-30 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX9.0 - DBX9.2 Controller parameter set switchover (request) requested parameter set Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: On...

  • Page 1887

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-31 DB31, ... DBX20.0 Rampup times Corresponding to .... MD1014 $MD_U/F_MODE_ENABLE (activate V/f operation) MD1125 $MD_UF_MODE_RAMP_TIME_1 ...

  • Page 1888

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-32 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX20.3 Speed setpoint smoothing Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The PL...

  • Page 1889

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-33 DB31, ... DBX21.0 - DBX21.2 Drive parameter set selection A, B, C • Speed setpoint filter • Speed monitoring data As soon as the new...

  • Page 1890

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-34 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX21.3 - DBX21.4 Motor selection A, B example(s) Special cases, errors, .... Notice: Before a new motor is selected, the int...

  • Page 1891

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-35 DB31, ... DBX21.7 Pulse enable Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Pulse enable is s...

  • Page 1892

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-36 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX61.0 Drive test travel request This means that the prerequisites specified above are not fulfilled. Further references /IAD...

  • Page 1893

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-37 DB31, ... DBX61.4 Axis/spindle stationary example(s) The workpiece chuck or the tool clamping device is only opened when the spindle is ...

  • Page 1894

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-38 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX61.6 Speed controller active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The con...

  • Page 1895

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-39 DB31, ... DBX69.0 - DBX69.2 Controller parameter set switchover (A (checkback signal)) Active parameter set • 1 corresponds to the 2nd...

  • Page 1896

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-40 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX92.1 Rampfunction generator fast stop active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change ...

  • Page 1897

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-41 DB31, ... DBX93.0 - DBX93.2 Active drive parameter set A, B, C Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Meaning The drive module ...

  • Page 1898

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-42 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX93.3 - DBX93.4 Active motor A, B Signal irrelevant for ... SINUMERIK 810D Corresponding to .... DB31, ... DBX21.3 and DBX...

  • Page 1899

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-43 DB31, ... DBX93.5 Drive Ready Corresponding to .... DB10 DBX108.6 (611D-Ready) DB31, ... DBX61.7 (current controller active) DB31, .....

  • Page 1900

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-44 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX93.7 Pulses enabled Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The pulse enable ...

  • Page 1901

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-45 DB31, ... DBX93.7 Pulses enabled Pulse enable for 611D drive module Corresponding to .... DB31, ... DBX21.7 (pulse enable) MD1404 $MD_P...

  • Page 1902

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-46 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX94.0 Motor temperature pre-warning Application example(s) As soon as "Motor temperature prewarning" has been s...

  • Page 1903

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-47 DB31, ... DBX94.1 Heatsink temperature pre-warning • The drive module is switched off after 20 seconds. The drives are stopped when th...

  • Page 1904

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-48 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX94.2 Ramp-up completed Corresponding to .... DB31, ... DBX94.6 ("nact = nset") DB31, ... DBX94.3 ("|MD| =...

  • Page 1905

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-49 DB31, ... DBX94.3 |Md| < Mdx Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 611D signals to th...

  • Page 1906

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-50 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX94.3 |Md| < Mdx Corresponding to .... DB31, ... DBX94.2 (ramp-up completed)

  • Page 1907

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-51 DB31, ... DBX94.3 |Md| < Mdx MD1428 $MD_TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X MD1429 $MD_TORQUE_THRESHOLD_X_DELAY MD1427 $MD_SPEED_DES_EQ_ACT_DELAY Addi...

  • Page 1908

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-52 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX94.6 nact= nset Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 SIMODRIVE 611D/611U ...

  • Page 1909

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-53 DB31, ... DBX94.7 Variable signaling function The machine data: MD1620 $MD_PROG_SIGNAL_FLAGS (bits, variable signaling function) can be ...

  • Page 1910

    Detailed Description 2.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-54 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX95.0 VDC link < warning threshold Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → ...

  • Page 1911

    Detailed Description 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-55 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) 2.2.1 Signals to channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX1.1 Enable protection zones Edge evaluation: yes...

  • Page 1912

    Detailed Description 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-56 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 Activate channelspecific protection zone 1 ( ...10) 1 → 0 The protection zone is immediately de-activated. Only ...

  • Page 1913

    Detailed Description 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-57 DB21, ... DBX274.0 – DBX275.1 Channelspecific protection zone 1 (...10) pre-activated Corresponding to .... DB21, ... DBX10.0 - DBX11.1 (act...

  • Page 1914

    Detailed Description 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-58 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX2.3 Clamping in progress edge change 1 → 0 The clamping monitoring function is replaced by the standstill (zero speed) monitor...

  • Page 1915

    Detailed Description 2.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-59 DB31, ... DBX12.2 - DBX12.3 2nd software limit switch plus or minus MD36130 $MA_POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 (2nd software limit switch plus) and MD36120 $...

  • Page 1916

    Detailed Description 2.3 Continuouspath mode, exact stop and LookAhead (B1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-60 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.3 Continuouspath mode, exact stop and LookAhead (B1) 2.3.1 Signals from channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX36.3 All axes stationa...

  • Page 1917

    Detailed Description 2.4 Acceleration (B2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-61 DB31, ... DBX60.7 Position reached with exact stop fine Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Refer to DB31, ... D...

  • Page 1918

    Detailed Description 2.6 Travel to fixed stop (F1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-62 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX1.1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached Edge change 1 → 0 Meaning after the fixed stop has been reached: IS "Fixed stop reached" DB31, ...

  • Page 1919

    Detailed Description 2.7 Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control (G2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-63 DB31, ... DBX3.1 Enable travel to fixed stop IS irrelevant for ... MD37060 $MA_FIXED_STOP_ACKN_MASK (monitoring P...

  • Page 1920

    Detailed Description 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-64 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) 2.8.1 Signals to channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX30.5 Activate associated M01 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) u...

  • Page 1921

    Detailed Description 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-65 DB21, ... DBX59.0 - DBX59.4 M function 1-5 not included in list Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 M function less than 99 (for extended addres...

  • Page 1922

    Detailed Description 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-66 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBB98 - DBB115 S functions 1 to 3 Extended address S functions 1 to 3 1 → 0 Application example(s) Spindle speed control by the PLC. The...

  • Page 1923

    Detailed Description 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-67 DB21, ... DBB140 - DBB157 H functions 1 to 3 Extended address H functions 1 to 3 The H functions remain valid until they are overwritten by new H fun...

  • Page 1924

    Detailed Description 2.8 Help function output to PLC (H2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-68 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBB194 - DBB206 Dynamic M functions: M0 - M99 the same OB40 cycle. Application example(s) Spindle clockwise/counterclockwise rotation, swi...

  • Page 1925

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-69 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) 2.9.1 Signals to NC DB number Byte.Bit Description 10 56...

  • Page 1926

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-70 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB11, ... DBX0.2 JOG mode Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 JOG mode ...

  • Page 1927

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-71 DB11, ... DBX0.5 Mode group stop "stopped". All the moving axes of the mode group are decelerated according to ...

  • Page 1928

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-72 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB11, ... DBX1.0 Machine function TEACH IN Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change ...

  • Page 1929

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-73 DB11, ... DBX1.6 Single block type B Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Bit s...

  • Page 1930

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-74 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9.3 Signals from the mode group (DB11) DB11, ... DBX4.0 Selected mode AUTOMATIC Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated...

  • Page 1931

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-75 DB11, ... DBX5.0 Selected machine function TEACH IN Additional References /BA/ Operations Guide HMI (corresponding to the...

  • Page 1932

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-76 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB11, ... DBX6.1 Active mode MDA Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 MDA ...

  • Page 1933

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-77 DB11, ... DBX6.7 All channels in the reset state Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 At least one of the channels in ...

  • Page 1934

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-78 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9.4 Signals to channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX0.4 Activate single block Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cycli...

  • Page 1935

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-79 DB21, ... DBX1.6 PLC action completed 1 → 0 Corresponds to .... DB21, ... DBX32.3 (action block active) DB21, ... DBX32...

  • Page 1936

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-80 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX6.1 Read-in disable 1 → 0 Corresponds to .... DB21, ... DBX35.0 (program status running) DB21, ... DBX6....

  • Page 1937

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-81 DB21, ... DBX7.1 NC START Corresponds to .... DB21, ... DBX7.0 (NC start disable) DB21, ... DBX7.2 NC STOP at block li...

  • Page 1938

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-82 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX7.4 NC STOP axes plus spindles Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic See DB21, ... DBX7.3 (NC STOP)...

  • Page 1939

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-83 2.9.5 Signals from channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX32.3 Action block active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyc...

  • Page 1940

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-84 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX32.5 M00/M01 active Fig. Corresponds to .... DB21, ... DBX0.5 (activate M01) DB21, ... DBX24.5 (M01 selec...

  • Page 1941

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-85 DB21, ... DBX33.4 Block search active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1...

  • Page 1942

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-86 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX33.5 M02/M30 active Application example(s) The PLC can detect the end of program processing with this signal...

  • Page 1943

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-87 DB21, ... DBX35.0 Program status running The running program was stopped with the interface signal: DB21, ... DBX6.1 (rea...

  • Page 1944

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-88 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX35.2 Program status stopped Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 "Program status stopped" is not ...

  • Page 1945

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-89 DB21, ... DBX35.6 Channel status interrupted Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge chang...

  • Page 1946

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-90 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX36.5 Channel is ready Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 A...

  • Page 1947

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-91 DB21, ... DBB208 - DBB271 Active G function of groups 1 to 60 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal stat...

  • Page 1948

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-92 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX318.0 ASUB is stopped ASUB with REPOSA is triggered in the status AUTOMATIC mode stopped If the interrupt ...

  • Page 1949

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-93 DB21, ... DBX319.0 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1...

  • Page 1950

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-94 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX319.1 - DBX319.3 Repos Path Mode Ackn 0 - 2 Corresponds to .... DB21, ... DBX31.0 - DBX31.2 (REPOSPATHMODE...

  • Page 1951

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-95 DB21, ... DBX319.5 Repos DEFERAL Chan Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1...

  • Page 1952

    Detailed Description 2.9 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-96 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.9.7 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX70.0 REPOS offset Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic...

  • Page 1953

    Detailed Description 2.10 Axis types, coordinate systems, frames (K2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-97 DB31, ... DBX72.0 REPOSDELAY Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 After a block search, a...

  • Page 1954

    Detailed Description 2.11 EMERGENCY STOP (N2) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-98 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.11 EMERGENCY STOP (N2) 2.11.1 Signals to NC (DB10) DB10 DBX56.1 EMERGENCY STOP Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change ...

  • Page 1955

    Detailed Description 2.12 Transverse axes (P1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-99 DB10 DBX56.2 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP Special cases, errors, ...... The EMERGENCY STOP state cannot be reset using the interface signal: DB21, ... DBX7.7 ...

  • Page 1956

    Detailed Description 2.13 PLC basic program (P3) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-100 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.13 PLC basic program (P3) For specifications of the NC/PLC interface signals see: Literature: /FB1/ Functions Manual Basic Functions; PLC Basic Program pow...

  • Page 1957

    Detailed Description 2.14 Reference point approach (R1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-101 DB21, ... DBX33.0 Referencing active . The channel specific referencing is operational. Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 • channel specific...

  • Page 1958

    Detailed Description 2.14 Reference point approach (R1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-102 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.14.3 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX2.4 - DBX2.7 Reference point value 1 to 4 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Sig...

  • Page 1959

    Detailed Description 2.14 Reference point approach (R1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-103 2.14.4 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX60.4 Referenced/synchronized 1 Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 or e...

  • Page 1960

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-104 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2.15 Spindles (S1) 2.15.1 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX2.2 Spindle reset/delete distancetogo Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Edge...

  • Page 1961

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-105 DB31, ... DBX16.0 - DBX16.2 Actual gear stage A to C For each of the 5 gear stages, there is one set of parameters assigned as follows: Special cases, errors, .......

  • Page 1962

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-106 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX16.3 Gear is changed over ... Special cases, errors, ...... If the PLC user reports back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than issued by th...

  • Page 1963

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-107 DB31, ... DBX17.4 - DBX17.5 Re-synchronize spindle when positioning 2 and 1 Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 When positioning, the spin...

  • Page 1964

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-108 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX18.4 Oscillation controlled by the PLC (oscillation via the PLC). Application example(s) If the new gear stage cannot be engaged in spite of several att...

  • Page 1965

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-109 DB31, ... DBX18.5 Oscillation speed Signal irrelevant for ... ... All spindle modes except the oscillation mode. Application example(s) The oscillation speed is used...

  • Page 1966

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-110 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX30.1 Spindle start, clockwise rotation Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 DB31, ... DBX30.1 (spind...

  • Page 1967

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-111 DB31, ... DBX30.4 Spindle positioning Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 DB31, ... DBX30.4 (spindle positioning...

  • Page 1968

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-112 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX82.0 - 82.2 Setpoint gear stage A to C Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic See DB31, ... DB82.3 (change gear). Signal state 1 or edge chang...

  • Page 1969

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-113 DB31, ... DBX83.0 Speed limit exceeded Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The actual speed exceeds the maximum s...

  • Page 1970

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-114 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX83.2 Setpoint speed increased (programmed speed too low) 1 → 0 Application example(s) The interface signal indicates if the programmed set speed is u...

  • Page 1971

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-115 DB31, ... DBX83.7 Actual direction of rotation clockwise ... • Spindles without position measuring encoder Corresponds to .... DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stat...

  • Page 1972

    Detailed Description 2.15 Spindles (S1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-116 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBX84.7 Active spindle mode: Control mode Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The spindle is in control m...

  • Page 1973

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-117 DB31, ... DBB88 - DBB91 S function for spindle Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 An S function was output from the N...

  • Page 1974

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-118 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX0.6 Activate dry run feed Special cases, errors, ...... If the signal changes to "0" within a G33 block, the programmed feed is not activated unt...

  • Page 1975

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-119 DB21, ... DBB4 Feed rate override The factors listed in the table for the feed rate override are stored in the machine data: MD12030 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_FEEDRATE [n]. The...

  • Page 1976

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-120 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBB5 Rapid traverse override Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The rapid traverse override can be entered ...

  • Page 1977

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-121 DB21, ... DBB5 Rapid traverse override The factors listed in the table for the rapid traverse override are stored in the machine data: MD12050 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TR...

  • Page 1978

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-122 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX6.0 Feed disable Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The signal is active in one channel in all operating...

  • Page 1979

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-123 DB21, ... DBX6.7 Feed rate override active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The feed rate override between 0 and a ...

  • Page 1980

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-124 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB21, ... DBX24.6 Dry run feed rate selected When activated from the operator panel, the dry run feed signal is automatically entered in the PLC interface and transmitt...

  • Page 1981

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-125 DB 21, ... DBX29.0 - DBX29.3 Activate fixed feed rate 1 - 4 for path/geometry axes Corresponding to .... MD12202 $MN_PERMANENT_FEED[n] MD12200 $MN_RUN_OVERRIDE_0 ...

  • Page 1982

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-126 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBB0 Feed rate override (axisspecific) The factors listed in the table for the axial feed rate override are stored in the NC-specific machine data: MD12010...

  • Page 1983

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-127 DB31, ... DBX1.7 Override active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Feed rate override active: The axisspecific feed ...

  • Page 1984

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-128 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB 31, ... DBX3.2 - DBX3.5 Activate fixed feed rate 1 - 4 for machine axes Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Description These signals are used to select/d...

  • Page 1985

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-129 DB31, ... DBX4.3 Feed stop/spindle stop (axisspecific) Application example(s) Feed stop: The traversing motion of the machine axes is not started with "feed stop&...

  • Page 1986

    Detailed Description 2.16 Feeds (V1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-130 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DB31, ... DBB19 Spindle override The factors listed in the table for spindle override are stored in the machine data: MD12070 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_SPIND_SPEED [n] The tabl...

  • Page 1987

    Detailed Description 2.17 Tool Offset (W1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 2-131 2.16.3 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX62.2 Revolutional feed rate active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edg...

  • Page 1988

    Detailed Description 2.17 Tool Offset (W1) NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) 2-132 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0

  • Page 1989

    NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-1 Index D DB10 DBX103.0, 2-2 DBX103.5, 2-2 DBX103.6, 2-2 DBX103.7, 2-2 DBX104.7, 2-3 DBX106.1, 2-98 DBX108.1, 2-3 DBX108.2 - DBX108.3, 2-3 DBX108.6, 2-4 DBX108.7, 2-4 DBX109.0, 2-4 DBX109.5, 2-5 DBX109.6, 2-...

  • Page 1990

    Index NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Index-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 DBX25.0 - DBX25.7, 2-18 DBX26.1, 2-18 DBX26.2, 2-18 DBX26.3, 2-19 DBX26.5, 2-19 DBX26.6, 2-19 DBX26.7, 2-19 DBX27.0 - DBX27.7, 2-19 DBX40.0 - DBX40.7, 2-20 DBX41.0 - DBX41.7, 2-20 DBX42.0, 2-20 DBX4...

  • Page 1991

    Index NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-3 DBB88 - DBB91, 2-116 DBD 78, 2-68 DBD86, 2-68 DBD88, 2-68 DBX1.0, 2-22 DBX1.1, 2-61 DBX1.2, 2-62 DBX1.3, 2-22 DBX1.4, 2-25 DBX1.5 - DBX1.6, 2-26 DBX1.7, 2-126 DBX10.0, 2-94 DBX12.0 - DBX12.1, 2-58 DB...

  • Page 1992

    Index NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Index-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP, 2-97 Acknowledge fixed stop reached, 2-61 Action block active, 2-82 Activate associated M1, 2-63 Activate channelspecific protection zone, 2-55 Activate dry run feed, 2-1...

  • Page 1993

    Index NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Index-5 Feed rate override selected for rapid traverse, 2-123 Feed stop (Geometry axis 1 to 3), 2-122 Feed stop/spindle stop (axisspecific), 2-127 Fixed stop reached, 2-63 Follow up operation, 2-25 Followup...

  • Page 1994

    Index NC/PLC interface signals (Z1) Index-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 REPOS offset valid, 2-95 Repos Path Mode Ackn0-2, 2-92 REPOSDELAY, 2-94, 2-96 REPOSMODEEDGE, 2-82 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN, 2-92 Reset, 2-81 Re-synchronize spindle when positioning 2 and 1, 2-106 Resynchro...

  • Page 1995

    Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A-1 List of Abbreviations/Acronyms A A ADI4 Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes AC Adaptive Control ALM Active Line Module ARM Rotating induction motor AS Automation System ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Ameri...

  • Page 1996

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix A-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 COM Communication CPA Compiler Projecting dAta: Compiler configuring data CU Control Unit CP Communication Processor CPU Central Processing Unit: Central Processing Unit CR Carriage Return CTS Clear...

  • Page 1997

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A-3 ES Engineering System ESR Extended stop and retract ETC ETC key ">": Softkey bar extension in the same menu F FB Function block (PLC) FC Function Call: Function block (PLC) FEPROM Fla...

  • Page 1998

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix A-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 I IBN Commissioning ICA Interpolatory compensation INC Increment: Increment IPO Interpolator J JOG JOGging: Setup mode K KV Gain factor of control loop Kp Proportional gain KÜ Transmission r...

  • Page 1999

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A-5 N NC Numerical Control: Numerical Control NCK Numerical Control Kernel NCU Numerical Control Unit NRK Name of operating system of the NCK IS Interface signal ZO Zero offset NX Numerical eXtension (a...

  • Page 2000

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix A-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 PTP Point-To-Point Point-to-point PUD Program global User Data: Global program variable PZD Process Data: Process data part of a PPO Q QEC Quadrant error compensation R RAM Random Access Memo...

  • Page 2001

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 A-7 SRM Synchronous Rotary Motor LEC Leadscrew error compensation SSI Synchronous Serial Interface (interface type) SSL Block search STW Control word GWPS Grinding Wheel Peripheral Speed SW Software SW l...

  • Page 2002

    List of Abbreviations/Acronyms Appendix A-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 W WCS Workpiece Coordinate System T Tool TLC Tool Length Compensation WOP Workshop-Oriented Programming WPD Workpiece Directory: Workpiece directory TRC Tool Radius Compensation WZ Tool TO Tool off...

  • Page 2003

    Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-1 Glossary Absolute dimension Specifies the target of an axis motion in terms of a dimension relative to the zero point of the currently valid coordinate system. See → Incremental dimension Acceleration with jerk limitation...

  • Page 2004

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-2 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions enable part programs to transfer → parameters to the → PLC, which then trigger reactions defined by the machine manufacturer. Axes CNC axes are classified based on their...

  • Page 2005

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-3 Baud rate Rate of data transmission (bits/s). Block All files that are required for program creation and execution are designated as blocks. Block Part of a → part program that is demarcated by a line feed. There...

  • Page 2006

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-4 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 COM Component of NC control for implementing and coordinating communication. Compensation axis Axis whose setpoint or actual value is modified using the compensation value. Compensation table Table of interpolatio...

  • Page 2007

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-5 C-spline C-spline is the best known and most frequently used spline. The transitions at the interpolation points are tangentially continuous and have constant curvature. A third-degree polynomial is used. Cycle Pro...

  • Page 2008

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-6 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Exact stop When an exact stop statement is programmed, the position specified in a block is approached exactly and, if necessary, very slowly. To reduce the approach time, exact stop limits are defined for rapid t...

  • Page 2009

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-7 Geometry axis Geometry axes are used to describe a 2- or 3-dimensional area in the workpiece coordinate system. Ground Ground refers to all connected, inactive parts of equipment that cannot assume dangerous touch ...

  • Page 2010

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-8 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Inclined surface machining Drilling and milling operations on workpiece surfaces that do not lie in the coordinate planes of the machine can be performed easily using the "inclined-surface machining" fun...

  • Page 2011

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-9 Key switch The key switch on the → machine control panel has 4 positions that are assigned functions by the operating system of the control. The key switch has three different colored keys that can be removed in ...

  • Page 2012

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-10 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Machine control panel Operator panel of the machine tool containing keys, knobs, etc. and simple display elements, such as LEDs. It is used for immediate control of the machine tool via the PLC. Machine coordina...

  • Page 2013

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-11 Metric and inch dimensions Position and lead values can be programmed in inches in the machining program. Irrespective of the programmable dimensions (G70/G71), the controller is set to a basic system. Metric meas...

  • Page 2014

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-12 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 NURBS The motion control and path interpolation that occurs within the control is performed based on NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Splines). As a result, a uniform process is available within the control for all ...

  • Page 2015

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-13 Part program management Part program management can be organized by → workpieces. The size of the user memory determines the number of programs and the amount of data that can be managed. Each file (programs and...

  • Page 2016

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-14 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Polynominal interpolation Polynomial interpolation enables a wide variety of curve characteristics to be generated, such as straight line, parabolic, exponential functions (SINUMERIK 840D). Positioning axis Axis ...

  • Page 2017

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-15 Quadrant error compensation Contour errors at quadrant transitions, which arise as a result of changing friction conditions on the guideways, can be largely eliminated using quadrant error compensation. Quadrant e...

  • Page 2018

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-16 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Safety functions The control is equipped with permanently active montoring functions that detect faults in the → CNC, the → PLC, and the machine in a timely manner so that damage to the workpiece, tool, or ma...

  • Page 2019

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-17 Subblock Block preceded by "N" containing information for a sequence, e.g., positional data. Subroutine Sequence of statements of a → part program that can be called repeatedly with different defining ...

  • Page 2020

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-18 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Text editor See → Editor TOA area The TOA area includes all tool and magazine data. By default, this area coincides with the → channel area with regard to the reach of the data. However, machine data can be u...

  • Page 2021

    Glossary Appendix Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 Glossary-19 User interface The user interface is the display medium of a CNC control in the form of a screen. It features horizontal and vertical softkeys. User memory All programs and data such as part programs, subroutines,...

  • Page 2022

    Glossary Appendix Glossary-20 Function Manual, 03/2006 Edition, 6FC5397-0BP10-1BA0 3. Programmable Work offsets can be programmed for all path and positioning axes using the TRANS instruction. Working area Three-dimensional area in which the tool tip can enter based on the design of the machine...

  • Page 2023

    To SIEMENS AG Suggestions Corrections A&D MC MS Postfach 3180 91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY Tel.: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline] Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 63315 [Documentation] E-mail: actionURI(mailto:motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com):mailto:motioncontrol.docu@siemens.comactionURI(mailto:motio...

  • Page 2024

    User DocumentationSINUMERIKSINUMERIKOverview of SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl Documentation (03/2006)BrochureCatalog NC 61 *)Equipment Manual NCU *)Equipment ManualOperator Components *)840D slSINUMERIK840D sl840Di slS120CatalogD21.2 Servo Control *)SINAMICSDescription ofFunctionsSafety IntegratedDe...

  • Page 2025

    User DocumentationSINUMERIKSINUMERIKOverview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (03/2006)BrochureCatalog NC 61 *)Configuring (HW) *)– 840D– 810DEquipment ManualOperator Components *)SINUMERIK840D840Di810DSaftey IntegratedApplication ManualSafteyIntegrated840DiDescription ofFunctionsSa...

x